Синумерик 808d ошибка 700016

Manual

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK 808D

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual

Valid for the following control systems:

SINUMERIK 808D Turning (software version: V4.4.2) SINUMERIK 808D Milling (software version: V4.4.2)

Target group:

Electrical engineers, calibration engineers and testing

12/2014

6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

1

Mounting

2

Connecting

3

Switching on and preparing

4

for commissioning

Commissioning diagram

5

Default PLC applications

6

Commissioning the prototype

7

Series production

8

Other frequently used

9

functions

Appendix

A

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

WARNING

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG

Order number: 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Copyright © Siemens AG 2012.

Industry Sector

01/2015 Subject to change

All rights reserved

Postfach 48 48

90026 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

Table of contents

1

Delivery check ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7

2

Mounting………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.1

Mounting the controller ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.2

Mounting the drive ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

13

2.3

Mounting the motor…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16

3

Connecting …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.1

Interface overview…………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.2

Connecting the battery………………………………………………………………………………………………

19

3.3

Connecting according to the default PLC program………………………………………………………..

20

3.4

Connection Overview………………………………………………………………………………………………..

25

4

Switching on and preparing for commissioning…………………………………………………………………………….

27

4.1

Switching on controller………………………………………………………………………………………………

27

4.2

PPU keyboard function ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

28

4.3

MCP mode changeover …………………………………………………………………………………………….

29

4.4

Status LEDs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

30

4.5

Password ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.1

Access levels …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.2

Setting a password …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

33

4.6

Setting the date and time…………………………………………………………………………………………..

34

4.7

Introduction to the onboard assistants…………………………………………………………………………

35

5

Commissioning diagram …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

37

6

Default PLC applications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

39

6.1

Turning……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

39

6.2

Milling……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

43

6.3

PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

46

6.3.1

General information ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.2

Alarm properties……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.3

Activating the PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………….

48

6.3.4

Editing a PLC user alarm text …………………………………………………………………………………….

50

7

Commissioning the prototype ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1

Commissioning the controller …………………………………………………………………………………….

55

7.1.1

Entering machine data………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1.2

Setting the axis-relevant parameters …………………………………………………………………………..

56

7.1.2.1

Enabling the position control………………………………………………………………………………………

56

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3

Table of contents

7.1.2.2

Setting the leadscrew pitch, deceleration ratio, and motor rotation direction

…………………… 56

7.1.2.3

Setting the axis speed and acceleration ……………………………………………………………………..

57

7.1.2.4

Setting the position — loop gain …………………………………………………………………………………….

57

7.1.3

Setting the spindle — relevant parameters ……………………………………………………………………..

58

7.1.4

Approaching the reference point ………………………………………………………………………………..

60

7.1.5

Compensation parameter settings ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.2

Setting backlash compensation …………………………………………………………………………………

62

7.1.5.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

63

7.1.5.4

Setting protection levels ……………………………………………………………………………………………

66

7.2

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

68

7.2.1

Creating a series archive ………………………………………………………………………………………….

68

7.2.2

Creating a start — up archive for the prototype ……………………………………………………………….

69

7.2.3

Restoring the control system with the start — up archive file …………………………………………….

71

8

Series production…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

73

8.1

Uploading the series archive for series commissioning …………………………………………………

73

8.2

Data settings for individual machine …………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.2

Setting the backlash …………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.2.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

75

8.3

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.3.1

Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.3.2

Creating an original status archive ……………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.3

Creating the start — up archive ……………………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.4

Restoring the control system …………………………………………………………………………………….

77

9

Other frequently used functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………

79

9.1

Playing a slide show ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

79

9.2

Defining the service planner ……………………………………………………………………………………..

81

9.3

Using the OEM startup screen and the OEM machine logo …………………………………………..

84

A

Appendix

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

87

A.1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

Cutting reserved holes

87

A.2 …………………………………………………………………

Inserting, printing or cutting the MCP strips

88

A.3 …………………………………………………………………..

Basic knowledge about NC programming

89

A.4 …………………………………………………………………………………….

Selection of the transformers

90

A.5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Parameter list

91

A.5.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Basic machine data

91

A.5.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS V60 parameters

95

A.6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Diagnostics

97

A.6.1 …………………………………………………………………………………………

SINUMERIK 808D alarms

97

A.6.2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS alarms

97

A.6.2.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Overview of alarms

97

A.6.2.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Alarm list

98

A.6.2.3 ……………………………………………………………………………………..

Errors during drive self — test

101

A.6.2.4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Other faults

102

Commissioning Manual

4

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397 — 4EP10 — 0BA0

Table of contents

A.6.2.5

Display data list………………………………………………………………………………………………………

102

A.7

PLC user interfaces ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

104

A.7.1

Addressing ranges………………………………………………………………………………………………….

104

A.7.2

MCP ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.1

Signals from MCP…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.2

Signals to MCP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

106

A.7.2.3

Reading/writing NC data: Job …………………………………………………………………………………..

107

A.7.2.4

Reading/writing NC data: Result……………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.5

PI service: Job ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.6

PI service: Result……………………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.3

Retentative data area ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4

User Alarms …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4.1

User alarms: Activating……………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.2

Variables for user alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.3

Active alarm response …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.4.4

Acknowledgement of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5

Axis/spindle signals…………………………………………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.1

Transferred M and S functions, axis specific………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.2

Signals to axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5.3

Signals from axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………

111

A.7.6

PLC machine data ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

114

A.7.6.1

INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT) ………………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.2

HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) ……………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.3

FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT)………………………………………………………

114

A.7.6.4

User alarm: Configuring (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM) ………………………………..

114

A.7.7

Signals from/to HMI ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.1

Program control signals from the HMI (retentive area) (also refer to signals at channel

DB3200)………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.2

Program selection from PLC (retentive area) ……………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.3

Checkback signal: Program selection from HMI (retentive area) …………………………………..

115

A.7.7.4

Signals from HMI ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.5

Signals from PLC……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.6

Signals to maintenance planners………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.7

Signals from maintenance planners ………………………………………………………………………….

117

A.7.7.8

Signals from operator panel (retentive area) ………………………………………………………………

117

A.7.7.9

General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area)…………………………………………..

117

A.7.7.10

General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area)………………………………………………

118

A.7.8

Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel ……………………………………………………………..

118

A.7.8.1

Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

118

A.7.8.2

Decoded M signals (M0 to M99)……………………………………………………………………………….

119

A.7.8.3

Transferred T functions……………………………………………………………………………………………

119

A.7.8.4

Transferred M functions…………………………………………………………………………………………..

119

A.7.8.5

Transferred S functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.6

Transferred D functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.7

Transferred H functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9

NCK signals …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.1

General signals to NCK …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.2

General signals from NCK ……………………………………………………………………………………….

121

A.7.9.3

Signals at fast inputs and outputs……………………………………………………………………………..

121

A.7.9.4

Signals from fast inputs and outputs………………………………………………………………………….

122

A.7.10

Channel signals ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

123

A.7.10.1

Signals to NC channel …………………………………………………………………………………………….

123

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

5

Table of contents

A.7.10.2

Signals from NC channel ………………………………………………………………………………………..

125

A.7.11

Signals, synchronized actions………………………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.1

Signals, synchronized actions to channel………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.2

Signals, synchronized actions from channel………………………………………………………………

128

A.7.11.3

Reading and writing PLC variables…………………………………………………………………………..

129

A.7.12

Axis actual values and distance-to-go ………………………………………………………………………

129

A.7.13

Maintenance scheduler: User interface …………………………………………………………………….

130

A.7.13.1

Initial (start) data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.13.2

Actual data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.14

User interface for Ctrl-Energy ………………………………………………………………………………….

131

Index……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

133

Commissioning Manual

6

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

System overview

The SINUMERIK 808D is an economic CNC solution for milling and turning machines in the global market. For the turning variant, it is designed to control three axes, including two feed axes via two pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface. For the milling variant, it is designed to control four axes, including three feed axes via three pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface.

The following diagram shows a system configuration example for the SINUMERIK 808D control system:

Figure 1-1 SINUMERIK 808D control system overview (taking a milling machine for an example)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

7

Delivery check

Note

For a turning machine, you need two sets of setpoint cable + SINAMICS V60 drive + motor cable + brake cable (if necessary) + encoder cable + 1FL5 servomotor.

Legend

Name

Order number

1)

PPU141.1, turning

6FC5370-1AT00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AT00-0CA0 (Chinese)

PPU141.1, milling

6FC5370-1AM00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AM00-0CA0 (Chinese)

2)

MCP

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 (English)

6FC5303-0AF35-0CA0 (Chinese)

3)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to CPM60.1

6FC5548-0BA00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1BA0 (10 m)

4)

SINAMICS V60 Controlled Power Module

6SL3210-5CC14-0UA0 (4 A)

(CPM60.1)

6SL3210-5CC16-0UA0 (6 A)

6SL3210-5CC17-0UA0 (7 A)

6SL3210-5CC21-0UA0 (10 A)

5)

1FL5 Motor

1FL5060-0AC21-0AA0 (4 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AG0 (4 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AA0 (6 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AG0 (6 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AA0 (7.7 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AG0 (7.7 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AA0 (10 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AG0 (10 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AB0 (4 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AH0 (4 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AB0 (6 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AH0 (6 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AB0 (7.7 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AH0 (7.7 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AB0 (10 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AH0 (10 Nm, without key, with brake)

6)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to inverter or servo

6FC5548-0BA05-1AF0 (5 m)

spindle drive

6FC5548-0BA05-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA05-1BA0 (10 m)

7)

Motor cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-5LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-5LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

Brake cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-2BR00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2BR00-1BA0 (10 m)

9)

Encoder cable (shielded)

6FX6002-2LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

10)

Inverter or servo spindle drive

From Siemens or a third-party manufacturer

Commissioning Manual

8

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

Check list

Table 1- 1

PPU package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

8

Connectors

• I/O connectors: 7

• 24 V power input connector: 1

Table 1- 2 MCP package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Machine Control Panel (MCP)

1

MCP connection cable (for connecting the MCP to the PPU, max. 50 cm)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

6

Pre-printed MCP strip, Milling

1 set of 6 pieces

Blank strip paper, A4 size

1

Product Information for MCP

1

Table 1- 3 CNC accessories

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Setpoint cable to SINAMICS V60 (for feed axis)

2 (turning) or 3 (milling)

Setpoint cable to Siemens inverter or third-party drive (for spindle)

1

Note

Emergency stop button is not included in our scope of delivery. You can, if necessary, contact your local Siemens salesperson for it.

Table 1- 4

SINAMICS V60 package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

SINAMICS V60

1

Getting Started

1

Cable clamps

2

Warranty Card

1

Table 1- 5

1FL5 motor package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

1FL5 motor

1

Data sheet for 1FL5 motor

1

Table 1- 6 Cables individually packaged

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Motor cable (unshielded)

1

Brake cable (unshielded)

1

Encoder cable (shielded)

1

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

9

Delivery check

Commissioning Manual

10

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

2.1Mounting the controller

Cut-out dimensions

Figure 2-1 Cut-out dimensions (in mm)

Note

Make sure there is enough space around the PPU and the MCP for tightening the screws in the control cabinet.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

11

Mounting

2.1 Mounting the controller

Mounting dimensions

Figure 2-2 Mounting dimensions for PPU (in mm)

Figure 2-3 Mounting dimensions for MCP (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

12

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Mounting clearance (in mm)

To ensure easy maintenance purpose, you must provide sufficient clearance (recommended distance: 80 mm) between the maintenance door and the cabinet wall for replacing the battery and CF card:

Cabinet panel

Maintenance door

2.2Mounting the drive

Cut-outs and mounting dimensions

Figure 2-4 4/6/7 A version (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

13

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Figure 2-5 10 A version (in mm)

Mounting method

With 4xM5 preassembled screws, the drive can be mounted vertically onto the inner panel of the cabinet. The maximum screw torque must be 2.0 Nm.

Minimum mounting clearance

To ensure adequate cooling, as a minimum, maintain the specified clearance between drives, one drive and another device/inner panel of the cabinet.

Figure 2-6 Drive mounting clearance (in mm)

Using the cable clamps supplied

If the CE marking requirements for cables are mandatory, the line supply cable and the motor cable used must all be shielded cables. In this case, you can use the cable clamps as a ground connection between the cable shield and a common ground point.

Clamps can also be helpful in better fixing cables (the unshielded motor cable and the line supply cable) in place.

Commissioning Manual

14

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

The illustration below shows you how to use the clamps to fix both cables and to make a shield connection with the cable.

Figure 2-7 Cable fixing with two cable clamps

CAUTION

Make sure that the clamp for fixing the shielded motor cable has a good contact with the cable shield.

Note

Siemens does not provide the shielded motor cable. Please prepare the shielded motor cable by yourselves for CE certification.

After the installation, it is recommended that the terminal screws should be checked to ensure that they are tight.

Reference

For further information about the drive mounting, refer to SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

15

Mounting

2.3 Mounting the motor

2.3Mounting the motor

Mounting dimensions (mm)

Motor type

A (in mm)

B (in mm)

4 Nm

163 (205)

80

6 Nm

181 (223)

90

7.7 Nm

195 (237)

112

10 Nm

219 (261)

136

Note

Value in brackets is the length of a motor with a built-in brake unit.

Motors with plain shaft have the same dimensions.

Reference

For further information about the motor, refer to 1FL5 Motor Technical Data.

Commissioning Manual

16

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3.1Interface overview

Interface overview on the Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

NOTICE

The + 24 V and M signals of X200 must be connected; otherwise, the communication between the PPU and the drives does not function as it should.

Figure 3-1 Interface layout

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

17

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X100, X101, X102

Digital inputs

X200, X201

Digital outputs

X21

FAST I/O

X301, X302

Distributed I/O

X10

Hand-wheel inputs

X60

Spindle encoder interface

X54

Analog spindle interface

X2

RS232 interface

X51, X52, X53

Pulse drive interfaces

X30

USB interface, for connection with the MCP

X1

Power supply interface, +24V DC power supply

Battery interface

Slot for the System CompactFlash Card (CF card)

Front

USB interface

Interface overview on the Machine Control Panel (MCP)

Figure 3-2 Interface layout

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X10

USB interface, for connection with the PPU

Commissioning Manual

18

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

3.2Connecting the battery

A battery has been pre-assembled on the back cover of the PPU.

The battery is not connected when delivered. You must plug the battery connector into the battery interface by yourself before switching the controller on. You can access it after removing the maintenance door:

Maintenance door

Battery interface

Battery

Battery connector

Note

When connecting the battery, ensure that the groove is at the upper side; otherwise, the alarm «NCK battery alarm» will be output after you switch on the controller, and you could lose your data after an unexpected power failure if you do not insert the battery connector correctly.

Note

Battery

Life time: 3 years

Replacement: do not replace the battery when the controller is switched off; otherwise, your data can be lost.

Order number: 6FC5247-0AA18-0AA0.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

19

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

3.3Connecting according to the default PLC program

The SINUMERIK 808D has integrated with a default PLC application. If you perform the commissioning work with the default PLC application, perform wiring as follows.

Connecting the digital inputs and outputs

Figure 3-3 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Milling)

Commissioning Manual

20

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-4 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Turning)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

21

siemens 808D Manual

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Connecting the distributed I/O

Figure 3-5 Connecting the distributed I/O

Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (take X51: axis X for an example)

Figure 3-6 Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (X51: axis X)

Commissioning Manual

22

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Note

Filter

A line filter (rated current: 16 A, protection level: IP20) is required so that the system can pass the CE certification (radiated emission test or conducted emission test). The order number of Siemens recommended filter is 6SN1111-0AA01-1BA1.

Note

Circuit breaker

You can install a mains linear breaker (rated current: 15 A for 7 A or 10 A version of the drive and 10 A for 4 A or 6 A version of the drive; rated voltage: 250 VAC) to protect the system.

Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive

Figure 3-7 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (unipolar)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

23

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-8 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (bipolar)

Note

Cables for connecting X21 must be shielded ones.

Connecting the handwheel

Figure 3-9 Connecting the handwheel

Commissioning Manual

24

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

3.4Connection Overview

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

25

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

Note

For the turning variant, connection to X52 is optional and depends upon whether you use the software option «additional axis». If you desire to configure the control system to control a rotary axis or an additional linear axis, connect X52 to a SINAMICS V60 which connects to a servo motor.

Commissioning Manual

26

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4

DANGER

Carrying out of repairs

Anywhere in the automation equipment where faults might cause physical injury or major material damage, in other words, where faults could be dangerous, additional external precautions must be taken, or facilities must be provided, that guarantee or enforce a safe operational state, even when there is a fault (e.g. using an independent limit value switch, mechanical locking mechanisms, EMERGENCY STOP/EMERGENCY OFF devices).

4.1Switching on controller

Before switching on

Make sure that:

You have finished the mechanical installation of the whole system based on the information included in the chapter «Mounting (Page 11)» or the Mechanical Installation Manual.

You have completed the wirings of the whole system according to the information included in the chapter «Connecting (Page 17)» (if you use the default PLC program) or the Electrical Installation Manual.

Switching on

Do as follows:

1.Power on the mains supply.

2.When the NC enters the main screen, check the NC normal status according to the status LEDs on the PPU.

POK: green RDY: green TEMP: unlit

For detailed information about the status LEDs, refer to the section «Status LEDs (Page 30)».

3.Check the drive normal status:

«S-run» is displayed.

LED «RDY/JOG»: green

LED «ERR»: dark

For detailed information about the SINAMICS V60 drives, refer to the SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

27

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.2 PPU keyboard function

4.2PPU keyboard function

Legend

Name

Description

Return key

Returns to higher level menu

Horizontal softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Extension key

Reserved. No function

Vertical softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Operating area keys

Opens the «MACHINE» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM» operating area

Opens the «OFFSET» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM MANAGER» operating area

• Opens the «ALARM» operating area

• Combines with the <SHIFT> key to open the

«SYSTEM» area

Opens the «CUSTOM» operating area

Commissioning Manual

28

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.3 MCP mode changeover

4.3MCP mode changeover

Use the machine control panel (MCP) to make changeover between the JOG mode, the Ref Point mode, the AUTO mode and the MDA mode.

The MCP key layout is shown below:

Legend

Name

Description

Mode navigation

Enters the Ref. Point mode for reference point approach

keys

Enters the JOG mode (manual operation)

Enters the AUTO mode (automatic operation)

Enters the MDA mode (manual program input and auto-

matic execution)

Incremental feed

Axis traverses at the increment of 1

keys

Axis traverses at the increment of 10

Axis traverses at the increment of 100

Axis traversing keys

Move an axis (X, Y, Z)

RESET key

Resets NC programs

Cancels alarms

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

29

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.4 Status LEDs

4.4Status LEDs

LEDs on the PPU

The following LEDs are installed on the SINUMERIK 808D PPU.

The individual LEDs and their functions are described in the table below.

Table 4- 1 Status and error displays

LED

Color

Significance

POK

Green

Power supply is OK.

RDY

Green

Ready for operation

TEMP

Yellow

Temperature exceeds the limit

For more information, refer to error description in the SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostics Manual.

LEDs on the SINAMICS V60 drives

Figure 4-1 SINAMICS V60 status LEDs

Commissioning Manual

30

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Table 4- 2 Description of the LED status

Status LED 1

Status LED 2

Description

7-segment LED display description

RDY/JOG

ERR

Green LED

Red LED

Dark

Dark

No 24 V DC Input/Drive Defect

Dark

Dark

Flashing at 1 Hz

Drive not ready

Current status

Green

Dark

Drive ready

Depends on the current menu opera-

tion

Dark

Red

Drvie error

Alarm code

Green

Red

Initialization

Display «8.8.8.8.8.8.»

Flashing at 1 Hz

Dark

JOG mode

Display «J-run»

4.5Password

4.5.1Access levels

Purpose

Access levels/passwords are necessary to prevent system data damages caused by unexpected mistake operations.

Cases

You must set a password for an access level under following cases:

Data restoring

Software update

Password has been deleted

A higher or lower access level is required

Access levels

The SINUMERIK 808D provides a concept of access levels for enabling data areas. You can view such information from the table below:

Table 4- 3 Access level

Access level

Default password

Target group

Manufacturer

SUNRISE

OEMs

Customer

CUSTOMER

End users

No password

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

31

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

With the access level «Manufacturer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying all the machine data

Commissioning work

With the access level «Customer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying part of the machine data

Programming

Setting offsets

Measuring tools

For the function areas listed below, the input and modification of data depends on the protection level you have set:

Tool offsets

Work offsets

Setting data

RS232 settings

Program creation / program correction

You can set the protection levels for these function areas via the display machine data (USER_CLASS…): «SYSTEM» operating area > «Mach. data» > «Expert list» > «Display MD».

Note

For detailed information about the display machine data, refer to the Parameter Manual.

Note

For detailed information about how to set the access levels, refer to Programming and Operating Manual.

Access levels: Manufacturer, Customer

Both access levels require a password.

You can change the password only after being activated with the access level «Manufacturer».

If you forget your password, you can carry out an NC start-up: «SYSTEM» operating area > «Start-up» > «NC» > «Power-up with default data». This will reset all passwords to their defaults according to the software release you have acquired.

Note

Before performing a start-up with default data, you must backup your data; otherwise, you will lose your data. For detailed information about how to do data backup, refer to section «Data backup (Page 75)».

Commissioning Manual

32

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Access level: No password

If you have deleted your password or do not set a password, you only have the access right of viewing above-mentioned function areas.

Note

The system has no password by default.

4.5.2Setting a password

The control system is delivered without a password. You must input the password of «SUNRISE» to perform the commissioning work.

Perform the following steps to input the password:

1.In the «SYSTEM» operating area (key combination: + ), press the vertical softkey «Set password». The message text at the bottom of the screen shows «No password set»:

2.Enter «SUNRISE» and press the «Accept» softkey.

3.The message text now shows «Access level: Manufacturer», which indicates that you have successfully set the password.

Note

You can change the default password to you by using the «Change password» softkey.

You can also delete the current password to protect your settings by pressing the «Delete password» softkey.

After the series production, you must press the «Delete password» softkey to exit the «Manufacturer» access level.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

33

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.6 Setting the date and time

4.6Setting the date and time

At delivery, the system date and time remain at the factory settings, and thus you must manually modify the date and time. Proceed as follows to set the date and time:

1.Press + to enter the «SYSTEM» operating area, then press the softkey «Date time».

2. Input your date and time.

3. Press the «OK» softkey to confirm your settings.

Commissioning Manual

34

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

4.7Introduction to the onboard assistants

The SINUMERIK 808D system software has three onboard assistants:

Startup assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you commission the prototype. With this assistant, you can complete basic machine tool functions.

Series assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you correctly finish the series machine commissioning.

Operation assistant (requires «Customer» access level)

This onboard assistant is designed to help you learn about the basic operations of the machining process.

Where can I find the assistants?

Press the <MENU FUNCTION> key on the PPU to call the assistants:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

35

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

How can I use the assistants?

Status indicators:

Completed task

Current task

Partially completed task group

Uncompleted task

Press one of the three softkeys to access the corresponding assistant

Press to start the assistant

Press to return to the main screen of the onboard assistants

Press any operating area key (CUSTOM excluded) to exit the main screen of the onboard assistants and enter the corresponding operating area

Press to enter the current task or a task that is prior to the current task

Note: This softkey becomes active when you move the cursor key to a valid task.

Commissioning Manual

36

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Commissioning diagram

5

You can commission the SINUMERIK 808D in two ways:

Alternative 1: with the onboard assistants

Alternative 2: without the onboard assistants

When commissioning with the onboard assistants, just follow the assistants step by step.

In this manual, only the second way is described. To do the commissioning work without the onboard assistants, proceed as follows:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

37

Commissioning diagram

Commissioning Manual

38

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6

6.1Turning

Overview of the PLC subroutines

Subroutine No.

Name

Description

0 to 19

Reserved for the manufacturer

20

AUX_MCP

Auxiliary function

21

AUX_LAMP

Lamp control, called in the subroutine «AUX_MCP».

31

PLC_ini_USR_INI

Reserved for the initialization by the manufacturer (this subroutine is automati-

cally called by subroutine 32)

32

PLC_INI

PLC initialization

33

EMG_STOP

Emergency Stop

37

MCP_NCK

Signals from the MCP and the HMI are sent to NCK interfaces

38

MCP_Tool_Nr

Display tool numbers via the LED of the MCP

39

HANDWHL

Handwheel selection via HMI

40

AXIS_CTL

Control of feed axis enable and spindle enable

41

MINI_HHU

Handwheel hand held unit

42

SPINDLE

Spindle function

43

MEAS_JOG

Tool measurement in the JOG mode

44

COOLING

Coolant control (Manual Machine key and M code: M07, M08, M09)

45

LUBRICATE

Lubrication control (interval and time)

46

PI_SERVICE

ASUP (Asynchronous Subroutine Program)

47

PLC_Select_PP

PLC selects a subroutine.

48

ServPlan

Service plan

49

Gear_Chg1_Auto

Automatic gear change of the spindle

50

Gear_Chg2_Virtual

Dummy gear change of the spindle

51

Turret1_HED_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: Hall element transistor, 4/6

position)

52

Turret2_BIN_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with codings)

53

Turret3_CODE_T

Hydraulic turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with

codings)

54

Turret2_3_ToolDir

Evaluate tool direction and calculate tool position (called by Turret2_BIN_T,

Turret3_CODE_T)

55

Tail_stock_T

Tail stock control

56

Lock_unlock_T

Clamp or release control

58

MM_MAIN

Manual machine

59

MM_MCP_808D

Spindle signal processing for the manual machine

61, 62

Reserved for the subroutine

63

TOGGLE

Six key-operated switches: K1 to K6

Two delay switches: k7, K8

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

39

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Definition of user-defined keys on the MCP

User-defined key 1

Working lamp

User-defined key 2

Manual cooling

User-defined key 3

Manual tool change

User-defined key 4

Manual chuck clamping and unclamping

User-defined key 5

Chuck clamping internally/externally

User-defined key 6

Tailstock

Structure of the sample application (OB1)

Call Conditions

Subroutine Name

Description

First scan (SM0.1)

PLC_INI (SBR32)

PLC initialization

Each scan (SM0.0)

EMG_STOP (SBR33)

Emergency Stop control

Each scan (SM0.0)

MCP_NCK (SBR37)

Transferring MCP and HMI signals to the NCK interface

Each scan (SM0.0)

HANDWHL (SBR39)

Selecting a hand wheel through the interface signal

DB1900.DBB1xxx

Each scan (SM0.0)

AXIS_CTL (SBR40)

Coordinate enabling control, hardware limit, etc.

Each scan (SM0.0)

COOLING (SBR44)

Cooling control

Each scan (SM0.0)

TURRET1 (SBR46)

HALL effect device turret control

Each scan (SM0.0)

ServPlan (SBR48)

Maintenance plan example: first task

PLC user alarms

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700010

DB1600.DBX1.2

HHU is active

SBR41: MINI_HHU

700011

DB1600.DBX1.3

Not able to lock tool in expected time

700012

DB1600.DBX1.4

Spindle in braking progress

SBR42: SPINDLE

700013

DB1600.DBX1.5

Operation while chuck is not locked

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

700014

DB1600.DBX1.6

Gear-change time out

SBR49: GearChg1_Auto

700015

DB1600.DBX1.7

Gear level position error

700016

DB1600.DBX2.0

Drives not ready

SBR33: EMG_STOP

700017

DB1600.DBX2.1

Operate chuck when spindle or part program is

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

running

700018

DB1600.DBX2.2

Cooling motor overload

SBR44: COOLING

700019

DB1600.DBX2.3

Coolant liquid position in low level

700020

DB1600.DBX2.4

Lubrication motor overload

SBR45: LUBRICAT

700021

DB1600.DBX2.5

Lubricant liquid position in low level

700022

DB1600.DBX2.6

Turret motor overload

SBR51: Turret1_HED_T

700023

DB1600.DBX2.7

Programmed tool number > max. turret on turret

SBR52: Turret2_BIN_T

number

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700024

DB1600.DBX3.0

Max. tool number setting error

700025

DB1600.DBX3.1

No position signals from turret

700026

DB1600.DBX3.2

Not able to find expected tool in monitor time

Commissioning Manual

40

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700027

DB1600.DBX3.3

Approach reference point again after rotation

SBR40: AXIS_CTL

monitoring

700028

DB1600.DBX3.4

Tool is not locked

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700049

DB1600.DBX6.1

Reference point X-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700050

DB1600.DBX6.2

Reference point Z-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700051

DB1600.DBX6.3

Wrong spindle direction started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700052

DB1600.DBX6.4

Watchdog timer JOG-program

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700053

DB1600.DBX6.5

Spindle override not 100%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700054

DB1600.DBX6.6

Spindle is not started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700055

DB1600.DBX6.7

Feed override = 0%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700056

DB1600.DBX7.0

Change of spindle direction not possible in

SBR58: MM_MAIN

thread

700059

DB1600.DBX7.3

Safe door not closed, NC start not possible

SBR22:

AUX_SAFE_DOOR

700060

DB1600.DBX7.4

Channel not in reset, change PRT not possible

SBR37: MCP_NCK

Relevant machine data

MD14510

Unit

Range

Function

Machine data — Integer

14510[12]

*

0 to 1

JOG key layout

14510[20]

2 to 64

The maximum number of tool positions

14510[21]

0.1s

5 to 30

Time for locking a turret

14510[22]

0.1s

30 to 300

The monitoring time for searching a tool

14510[24]

1 min

5 to 300

Lubrication interval

14510[25]

0.01s

100 to 2,000

Lubrication duration

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

41

  • Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D
  • Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D
  • Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • SINUMERIK 808D программирование
  • SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию
  • О SINUMERIK 808D
  • Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DКомпания «Кернел» производит ремонт ЧПУ с 2002 года. За это время мы накопили колоссальный опыт в том числе опыт в ремонте SINUMERIK 808D такого известного производителя как SIEMENS. Ремонт подобной промышленной электроники ответственное и сложное занятие, требующие максимальной отдачи, профессионализма и максимально полной материальной базе.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в производится как в сервисном центре, так и с выездом специалиста на территорию заказчика. SINUMERIK 808D является крайне сложной промышленной электроникой соответственно ремонт SINUMERIK 808D можно доверить только настоящим профессионалам своего дела с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении.

Все специалисты нашего сервисного центра имеют высшее техническое образование, огромный опыт и максимально полную материальную базу включая новейшее высокотехнологичное диагностическое оборудование благодаря чему ремонт SINUMERIK 808D проходит максимально эффективно.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра уделяют максимальное внимание к качеству исполнения ремонта, программирования и настройке ЧПУ, не зависимо от производителя данного промышленного оборудования. Именно поэтому мы смело даем гарантию на ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и замененные в процессе ремонта компоненты шесть месяцев.

Особое внимание заслуживает тот факт, что ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в производится исключительно с использованием оригинальных запасных частей, на компонентном уровне с применением высокотехнологичного оборудования, квалифицированным персоналом с инженерным образованием.

Если на вашем производстве появились проблемы с ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D, которые вы не можете решить самостоятельно, мы всегда рады вам помочь. Обращайтесь в сервисный центр «Кернел». Специалисты нашей компании в минимальные сроки проведут глубокую диагностику ЧПУ и последующий ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в . Оставьте аявку на ремонт ЧПУ используя форму на сайте.

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения об ошибках SINUMERIK 808D и обработка ошибок

При возникновении ошибок при выполнении циклов выдается сигнал и выполнение цикла прерывается. Кроме того, сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Ошибки с их действием и сообщениями в строке сообщений СЧПУ описаны совместно с описанием конкретных циклов.

Обработка ошибок SINUMERIK 808D в циклах

В циклах генерируются сообщения об ошибках с номерами от 61000 до 62999. Диапазон номеров, в свою очередь, снова делится в соответствии с реакциями на ошибки и критериями отмены. Текст ошибки, который отображается вместе с номером ошибки, предоставляет более подробную информацию о причине ошибки.

Номер ошибки

Критерий сброса

Реакция на ошибку

61000 … 61999

NC_RESET

Подготовка кадра в СЧПУ прервана

62000 … 62999

Кнопка сброса

Прерывается подготовка кадра; цикл может быть продолжен нажатием следующей клавиши на MCP после удаления ошибки:

Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Номера ошибок классифицируются следующим образом:

6

_

Х

_

_

  • X=0 Общие ошибки циклов
  • X=1 Ошибки, возникшие при сверлении, фрезеровании
  • X=6 Ошибки, возникшие в циклах токарной обработки

Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Сообщения предоставляют информацию относительно поведения циклов хода обработки и, как правило, хранятся за пределами рабочей операции или до конца цикла. Пример сообщения: «Глубина: в соответствии со значением относительной глубины» для всех циклов сверления.

Все ошибки SINUMERIK 808D описаны в руководстве пользователя, которое вы можете скачать с нашего сайта в удобном формате- pdf.

Скачать руководство пользователя (диагностика) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

Устранение причины ошибки и ее сброс на станке оснащенным системой ЧПУ позволит в кратчайшие сроки возобновить работу. К сожалению не все ошибки можно исправить самостоятельно, некоторые ошибки SINUMERIK 808D возможно исправить только в специализированных сервисных центрах.

SINUMERIK 808D программирование

Программирования SINUMERIK 808DНа ряду с ремонтом, специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» выполняют программирование SINUMERIK 808D и настройку параметров системы ЧПУ. Подобную услугу мы оказываем не только на территории сервисного центра, также инженер компании может выполнить программирование SINUMERIK 808D на территории заказчика.

Настройка параметров, программирование SINUMERIK 808D является заключительным звеном в процессе ремонта ЧПУ и требует профессионального подхода. Именно финальный этап программирования SINUMERIK 808D наглядно покажет качество выполненного ремонта SINUMERIK 808D.

К слову, мы уделяем особое внимание качеству и смело даем гарантию на все выполненные ремонтно-восстановительные работы шесть месяцев, гарантия так же распространяется на запасные части, которые были заменены в процессе ремонта.

Хочется обратить внимание на то, что мы стараемся провести ремонт и программирование SINUMERIK 808D в максимально сжатые сроки, тем самым минимизируем простой дорогостоящего промышленного оборудования.

Дополнительно можно скачать руководство по программированию SINUMERIK 808D в формате- pdf

Скачать руководство пользователя (программирование) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра «Кернел» не только выполняют качественный ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и программирование ЧПУ в . Так же мы предоставляем услугу запуска в эксплуатацию оборудования от стадии проектирования до выпуска первой продукции.

Именно этап запуска в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D отвечает за долгий и безаварийный процесс работы промышленного оборудования, тем самым позволяя получить максимальную прибыль и сэкономить на незапланированном ремонте.

По-настоящему качественный ввод в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D может выполнить только высококвалифицированный специалист с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении. Найти подобного специалиста достаточно сложно, но, если вы обращаетесь в наш сервисный центр вам не придется об этом думать.

В нашей команде работают исключительно профессионалы своего дела, а за время существования нашей компании мы ввели в эксплуатацию не одну сотню систем ЧПУ в том числе и SINUMERIK 808D, с каждым разом получая и накапливая драгоценный опыт.

О SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 808D объединяет в себе качественно сконфигурированную систему ЧПУ предназначенную для работы на фрезерных и токарных станках.

Пример сборки для токарной обработки с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T PPU 160.3 vertical, English layout

1

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP vertical, with handwheel slot, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

RS422 (TTL) incremental encoder, 1024 S/R

1

6FX2001-2EB02

Spring disk coupling, shaft diameter 6 mm/6 mm

1

6FX2001-7KF10

Clamp strap for encoders with Synchro flange

3

6FX2001-7KP01

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 160.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 5 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AF0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 3.0 A

1

6SL3210-5DE13-5UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 5.3 A

1

6SL3210-5DE17-8UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – absolute encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-2DB10-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 1.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-5CL02-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5CL12-1AF0

Pre-assembled brake cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor with holding brake, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1AF0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1AF0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 4 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

1

1FL6061-1AC61-2LG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 11 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6066-1AC61-2LH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle spindle motor, 53 Nm, 1000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LD10-0GA0

Пример сборки для фрезерования с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M PPU 161.3 horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5370-2AM03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0

Electronic handwheel, with front plate 120 mm × 120 mm, with setting wheel, 5 V DC, RS 422

1

6FC9320-5DB01

Terminal strip converter 50-pole

1

6EP5406-5AA00

Cable set, 50-pole ribbon cable, with insulation displacement connectors, 50-pole

1

6EP5306-5BG00

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 161.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 7 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AH0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 4.6 A

2

6SL3210-5DE16-0UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 7.8 A

1

6SL3210-5DE21-0UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

3

6FX3002-2CT12-1BA0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m (32.81 ft)

3

6FX3002-5CL12-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1BA0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 8 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

2

1FL6064-1AC61-2AG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 15 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6067-1AC61-2AH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, 48 Nm, 1500 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LF12-0GA0

SINUMERIK 808D1) Выбор тормозного резистора см. В приводе шпинделя SINAMICS V70.

2) Перечисленные выше 30-метровые силовые кабели (необработанные) можно выбрать для использования с двигателями 1PH1. Вы должны собрать кабель питания с разъемами самостоятельно. Вы также можете выбрать сторонний кабель питания в соответствии с конфигурацией системы.

SINUMERIK 808D выполнен в двух вариантах:

  • Горизонтальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 261.3/PPU 281.3);
  • Вертикальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 260.3/PPU 280.3).

SINUMERIK 808D это моноблочная система ЧПУ, объединяющая в одном устройстве все компоненты СЧПУ:

  • ЧПУ, PLC, HMI;
  • полная клавиатура СЧПУ;
  • регулятор для 6 приводов.

Двигатели могут подключаться напрямую через DRIVE-CLiQ к цифровой приводной системе. В комбинации с модульным исполнением приводной системы SINAMICS S120 получается простая и надежная конструкция с минимальным объемом межкомпонентных соединений.

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 828D

Точно подобранный набор функций системы ЧПУ для стандартных токарных и фрезерных станков отвечает всем требованиям мелко- и крупносерийного производства. Специально подобранные системные параметры для токарной и фрезерной технологии позволяют значительно сократить расходы на ввод станка в эксплуатацию.

Моноблочная система ЧПУ крепится с задней стороны с помощью специальных элементов, входящих в объем поставки.

Линейка промышленной электроники, которую восстанавливают специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» не имеет ограничений, мы выполняем качественный ремонт промышленной электроники и оборудования абсолютно любых производителей не зависимо от года выпуска и наличия технической документации.

Ниже приведен далеко не полный список ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D ремонт которых предлагает наш сервисный центр.

6FC5370-2BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0CA0

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel

6FC5303-0AF35-2AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирования SINUMERIK 808D в можно с помощью специальной формы, которая вызывается нажатием одноименной кнопки в верхней части страницы. Все вопросы, связанные с ремонтом SINUMERIK 808D в вы можете задать нашим менеджерам. Связаться с ними можно несколькими способами:

Наши контакты

  • Заказав обратный звонок (кнопка в правом нижнем углу сайта)
  • Посредством чата (кнопка расположена с левой стороны сайта)
  • Позвонив по номеру телефона: +7(8482) 79-78-54; +7(917) 121-53-01
  • Написав на электронную почту: 89171215301@mail.ru

Вот далеко не полный список производителей промышленной электроники и оборудования, ремонтируемой в нашей компании.

Sinumerik 808D, коническая резьба – ошибка энкодера (026030)

При попытке выполнить коническую резьбу (разные диаметры DM1 и DM2),

Sinumerik выдает ошибку

026030 Axis MX1 encoder 1 absolute position lost

после ошибки ось Х нужно повторно реферировать.

Ошибка появляется при реальной работе и при симуляции.

При выполнении других программ (например, продольная резьба), ошибок нет.

В чем может быть проблема?

Если бы была реальная проблема с энкодером,

то эта ошибка появлялась бы всегда, при выполнении любых программ, но ошибка появляется только при программе – коническая резьба.

В прикреплении видео, когда появляется ошибка и программа.

Токарный станок на базе Sinumerik 808D Adv. (после модернизации, модернизацию делали сами)

PPU 161.2 6FC5370-2AT02-0AA0

Две оси X и Z управляются через привода

Sinamics V70 6SL3210-5DE21-4UA0 и

мотор 1FL6 (1FL6092-1AC61-0LG1, с абсолютным энкодером)

управление по DRIVE BUS)

Шпиндель (старый привод DC), управление по аналоговому заданию 0..10В, есть инкрементный энкодер.

img_20181220_095804.jpg


Изменено 22.12.2018 13:52 пользователем __engineer__

#1

OFFLINE
 

pro-ingener

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 3 сообщений
  • Из:Б

Отправлено 20 Октябрь 2012 — 16:00

Прошу помощи.

Стойка Sinumerik 840D выдает ошибки 700208 и 14014
Суть в следующем.
Есть программа объемом 10 Мб, что существенно больше оперативки (около 1 Мб).
Делаю все как прописанов в инструкции п.4.6.6 «Руководства пользователя. Обработка с жесткого диска», перевожу в автоматический режим и т.д.
Так вот, когда все готово и нажимаешь кнопку «NC-start» на экране появляется сначала ошибка 700208, потом 14014.
До этого в автоматическом режиме на станке никто не работал по причине ненадобности.
Попробовали также запустить программу объемом в 30Кб (давно отработанную в ручном режиме) в автоматическом режиме — выскакивают теже ошибки.
В «Руководстве…» прописано, что с номерами ошибки с 700000 и выше обращайтесь к изготовителю станка, а где его найдешь, прошло уже лет десять.
Возможно у кого-нибудь встречались подобные сбои прошу, помогите.
Стойка Sinumerik 840D, MMC 103.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#2

pro-ingener

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 3 сообщений
  • Из:Б

Отправлено 22 Октябрь 2012 — 09:16

Вот что высвечивается на экране:
Ошибка 700208 — ошибка PI выбора программы,
Ошибка 14014 — канал 1 выбранная программа «sverlenie.MPF» или право доступа отсутствует.
Станок производства немецкой фирмы SW BAS 03-12.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#3

Rtype

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Ковров

Отправлено 22 Октябрь 2012 — 13:56

Вам на форум сапр2000 надо. Здесь не помогут, профиль немного другой.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#4

windnord1

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 2 сообщений
  • Из:ulan-ude

Отправлено 30 Сентябрь 2015 — 11:01

sinumerik 802d выдает ошибку 700027

Помогите!!

  • 0

  • Наверх

#5

3D-BiG

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Ареал обитания — вся страна, но обычно встречаюсь в Новосибирске…
  • Интересы:Полежать на диване, пофлудить на форуме….
  • Из:СССР

Отправлено 30 Сентябрь 2015 — 16:59

sinumerik 802d выдает ошибку 700027 Помогите!!

Вам на форум сапр2000 надо. Здесь не помогут, профиль немного другой.

  • 0

Лужу, паяю, станки ЧПУ починяю….
Еще частенько здесь болтаю: Телеграм сообщество ЧПУшников: t.me/cncunion

  • Наверх

#6

Terex

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 1 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Жлобин

Отправлено 17 Август 2016 — 00:08

Ошибка 14014 — канал 1 выбранная программа «sverlenie.MPF» или право доступа отсутствует.

14014

Канал %1 выбранная программа %3 отсутствует или редактируется

Параметр: %1 = номер канала

%2 = номер кадра, метка

%3 = имя программы

Объяснение:

Выбранная программа обработки детали находится не в памяти NCK или право доступа

для выбора программы соответствует более высокому уровню из актуального состояния

СЧПУ.

При создании этой программы она получила активную степень защиты СЧПУ.

От ПО 5 программа, редактируемая на HMI, более не может быть запущена с NC-Start.

Ошибка устанавливается и тогда, когда для определения GUD или макроопределения

был выбран файл, отличный от предусмотренных для этого файлов определения.

Реакции:

индикация ошибки

Помощь:

Догрузить необходимую программу в память NCK или проверить имя директории и

программы.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#7

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 28 Февраль 2017 — 21:33

Подскажите кто в курсе.Высвечивает ошибка 700047.Нет защиты привода.Куда копать?

  • 0

  • Наверх

#8

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 28 Февраль 2017 — 22:16

70XXXX группа ошбок относится к пользовательской части PLC и строго говоря к PLC Siemens не относится. Данную группу описывает изготовитель станка — соотв спрашивайте завод/продавца. Нормальный производитель по коду ошибки скажет что и где искать (серийный номер станка!).

Еще, конечно, можно лезть в PLC ручками, однако если не знаете что творите, то лучше не надо.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#9

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 28 Февраль 2017 — 23:22

Еще, конечно, можно лезть в PLC ручками, однако если не знаете что творите, то лучше не надо.

Позвонил знакомому Томашу в Польшу.Жду ответа.В PLC лажу периодически когда каретка глючит.

Эта ошибка по защите привода выскакивала,но повторный запуск проги решал вопросы.Сегодня даже перезагрузка станка не помогла.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#10

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 01 Март 2017 — 21:04

Посоветовал постучать по релюшке.Прокатило.Заработал))))

  • 0

  • Наверх

#11

vv92

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Н.Новгород
  • Из:Н.Новгород

Отправлено 02 Март 2017 — 01:23

Я, когда служил, тоже обучал молодых стучать по релюшкам, а до этого меня так учили и видимо многими поколениями до.

Мне и в голову не приходило релюшки заменить. А в воздухе четырнадцать истребителей и не все ассы, ну и генерал у мониторов, хожу-пинаю, чё.

И да, из инструмента у нас по наследству маленькая отвертка передавалась. Но кто служил, знает, что можно было добыть и стрелочный осциллограф.

  • 0

Знаю технику безопасности как свои три пальца.Эксперт — это существо, которое перестало мыслить, ибо оно знает!В мире еще много граблей, на которые не ступала нога человека.
Пожалуйста! Исправляйте мои глупые ошибки (но оставьте мои умные ошибки)!

  • Наверх

#12

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 02 Март 2017 — 11:38

Посоветовал постучать по релюшке.Прокатило.Заработал))))

«Умом Россию не понять, аршином общим не измерить», релюшку не поменять…  , а — постучать!

Поменятьте по возможности, а то получите ударную установку.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#13

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 01:07

Подскажите….Есть постпроцессор под мою CNC машину.Только под какую программу не знаю. Как вообще с этим работать.

На данный момент работаю с лестницами и пишу самостоятельно програмки для трехосевой обработки.

Машина 5 осевая.Для лестниц специальная прога.Сама пишет програмки.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#14

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 02:17

Все ПП что я видел можно открыть как текстовой файл любым редактором ( блокнот и прочие ). Зачастую в заголовке указано для какой САМ прогрвммы данный ПП.
Какая такая специальная прога? Тут с телепатами напряженка, гадать некому.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#15

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 03:33

Vision Stolarstwo 2D 3D V1.0.arp

Постпроцессор где то есть у меня только я уже забыл куда я его сохранил.Даже не знаю как он выглядит.

Вот название …Это не он?

Програма для лестниц wagemeer/ Она проектирует и потом выдает файлы для станка.Там от оператора только поменять расширение и все.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#16

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 14:41

Расширение/тип файла ARP для ПП обычно указывает на AlphaCam. Скорее всего это ПП для AlphaCam’a.

А Вами указанная программа наверно столь экзотическая, что ничего в сети на нее не нашел.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#17

Lodochnik

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Королев

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 20:34

А Вами указанная программа наверно столь экзотическая, что ничего в сети на нее не нашел.

Просто название с ошибками написано, правильно Wagemeyer

  • 0

С уважением, Олег.

  • Наверх

#18

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 21:56

Скорее всего это ПП для AlphaCam’a

Спасибо.

Теперь вот вопрос.Где найти этот альфакам и как этими двумя програмами пользоваться.

И можно ли этот ПП переделать на компас.

правильно Wagemeyer

Да точно.Сам Антон приезжал и устанавливал в ЧПУшку.

Сейчас он свою прогу забросил и ушел работать в Старкон.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#19

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 04 Март 2017 — 00:20

AlphaCam надо не найдти, а купить. Лицензионное соглашение на ПО и закон РФ такой возможности не предусматривют. Вопросы пиратского ПО запрещены на этом форуме. Стоимость Вас обрадует.

Как ими пользоваться — странный вопрос. Изучать как работать в данной программе.

Компас, насколько я знаю, не может создавать программы для ЧПУ станков. Соотв ПП ему НЕ нужен. Изучайте АлфаКам, или Вами упомянутую программу.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#20

Marcus

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 3 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Оренбург

Отправлено 26 Декабрь 2017 — 14:34

Доброе время суток! Прошу помощи! 

Возникла проблема с координатно-пробивным станком Durma ТР9 с ЧПУ  Siemens Sinumerik 840D sl.

Станок выдает ошибку 12550. Выставление клампов не происходит. Выскакивает ошибка.

Прикрепленные изображения

  • z32L_6U9DaQ.jpg

Сообщение отредактировал Marcus: 26 Декабрь 2017 — 14:35

  • 0

  • Наверх

4.1.4

Alarm description

The control cannot receive the gear level signal/the control receives the wrong gear level signal.

PLC information

PLC address: DB1600.DBX1.7

Subroutine: GearChg1_Auto (SBR 49)

Remedy

● Check the related parts of the gear level signal as follows:

Use the PLC monitoring to detect if there is an input signal at the input interface of the gear level signal.

Check whether the input terminals of the interface on the back of the PPU are damaged/loose.

● Check whether the spindle gearbox has mechanical problems.

4.1.5

Alarm 700016

Alarm description

The drive is not ready for operation.

Note

This alarm always appears along with the alarm of emergency stop.

PLC information

PLC address: DB1600.DBX2.0

Subroutine: EMG_STOP (SBR 33)

Remedy

● Check whether there is an emergency stop alarm on the control system, which results in this alarm.

● Check whether the drive has an alarm/is not started/is damaged.

For the SINAMICS V60 drive, you should also check the X6 terminal to see

whether the wires are loose/broken or whether pins 65 and M24 have faults.

Service Manual

01/2017

33

Manual

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK 808D

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual

Valid for the following control systems:

SINUMERIK 808D Turning (software version: V4.4.2) SINUMERIK 808D Milling (software version: V4.4.2)

Target group:

Electrical engineers, calibration engineers and testing

12/2014

6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

1

Mounting

2

Connecting

3

Switching on and preparing

4

for commissioning

Commissioning diagram

5

Default PLC applications

6

Commissioning the prototype

7

Series production

8

Other frequently used

9

functions

Appendix

A

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

WARNING

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG

Order number: 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Copyright © Siemens AG 2012.

Industry Sector

01/2015 Subject to change

All rights reserved

Postfach 48 48

90026 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

Table of contents

1

Delivery check ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7

2

Mounting………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.1

Mounting the controller ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.2

Mounting the drive ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

13

2.3

Mounting the motor…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16

3

Connecting …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.1

Interface overview…………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.2

Connecting the battery………………………………………………………………………………………………

19

3.3

Connecting according to the default PLC program………………………………………………………..

20

3.4

Connection Overview………………………………………………………………………………………………..

25

4

Switching on and preparing for commissioning…………………………………………………………………………….

27

4.1

Switching on controller………………………………………………………………………………………………

27

4.2

PPU keyboard function ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

28

4.3

MCP mode changeover …………………………………………………………………………………………….

29

4.4

Status LEDs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

30

4.5

Password ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.1

Access levels …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.2

Setting a password …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

33

4.6

Setting the date and time…………………………………………………………………………………………..

34

4.7

Introduction to the onboard assistants…………………………………………………………………………

35

5

Commissioning diagram …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

37

6

Default PLC applications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

39

6.1

Turning……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

39

6.2

Milling……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

43

6.3

PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

46

6.3.1

General information ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.2

Alarm properties……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.3

Activating the PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………….

48

6.3.4

Editing a PLC user alarm text …………………………………………………………………………………….

50

7

Commissioning the prototype ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1

Commissioning the controller …………………………………………………………………………………….

55

7.1.1

Entering machine data………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1.2

Setting the axis-relevant parameters …………………………………………………………………………..

56

7.1.2.1

Enabling the position control………………………………………………………………………………………

56

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3

Table of contents

7.1.2.2

Setting the leadscrew pitch, deceleration ratio, and motor rotation direction

…………………… 56

7.1.2.3

Setting the axis speed and acceleration ……………………………………………………………………..

57

7.1.2.4

Setting the position — loop gain …………………………………………………………………………………….

57

7.1.3

Setting the spindle — relevant parameters ……………………………………………………………………..

58

7.1.4

Approaching the reference point ………………………………………………………………………………..

60

7.1.5

Compensation parameter settings ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.2

Setting backlash compensation …………………………………………………………………………………

62

7.1.5.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

63

7.1.5.4

Setting protection levels ……………………………………………………………………………………………

66

7.2

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

68

7.2.1

Creating a series archive ………………………………………………………………………………………….

68

7.2.2

Creating a start — up archive for the prototype ……………………………………………………………….

69

7.2.3

Restoring the control system with the start — up archive file …………………………………………….

71

8

Series production…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

73

8.1

Uploading the series archive for series commissioning …………………………………………………

73

8.2

Data settings for individual machine …………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.2

Setting the backlash …………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.2.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

75

8.3

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.3.1

Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.3.2

Creating an original status archive ……………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.3

Creating the start — up archive ……………………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.4

Restoring the control system …………………………………………………………………………………….

77

9

Other frequently used functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………

79

9.1

Playing a slide show ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

79

9.2

Defining the service planner ……………………………………………………………………………………..

81

9.3

Using the OEM startup screen and the OEM machine logo …………………………………………..

84

A

Appendix

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

87

A.1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

Cutting reserved holes

87

A.2 …………………………………………………………………

Inserting, printing or cutting the MCP strips

88

A.3 …………………………………………………………………..

Basic knowledge about NC programming

89

A.4 …………………………………………………………………………………….

Selection of the transformers

90

A.5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Parameter list

91

A.5.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Basic machine data

91

A.5.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS V60 parameters

95

A.6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Diagnostics

97

A.6.1 …………………………………………………………………………………………

SINUMERIK 808D alarms

97

A.6.2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS alarms

97

A.6.2.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Overview of alarms

97

A.6.2.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Alarm list

98

A.6.2.3 ……………………………………………………………………………………..

Errors during drive self — test

101

A.6.2.4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Other faults

102

Commissioning Manual

4

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397 — 4EP10 — 0BA0

Table of contents

A.6.2.5

Display data list………………………………………………………………………………………………………

102

A.7

PLC user interfaces ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

104

A.7.1

Addressing ranges………………………………………………………………………………………………….

104

A.7.2

MCP ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.1

Signals from MCP…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.2

Signals to MCP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

106

A.7.2.3

Reading/writing NC data: Job …………………………………………………………………………………..

107

A.7.2.4

Reading/writing NC data: Result……………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.5

PI service: Job ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.6

PI service: Result……………………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.3

Retentative data area ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4

User Alarms …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4.1

User alarms: Activating……………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.2

Variables for user alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.3

Active alarm response …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.4.4

Acknowledgement of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5

Axis/spindle signals…………………………………………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.1

Transferred M and S functions, axis specific………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.2

Signals to axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5.3

Signals from axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………

111

A.7.6

PLC machine data ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

114

A.7.6.1

INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT) ………………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.2

HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) ……………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.3

FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT)………………………………………………………

114

A.7.6.4

User alarm: Configuring (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM) ………………………………..

114

A.7.7

Signals from/to HMI ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.1

Program control signals from the HMI (retentive area) (also refer to signals at channel

DB3200)………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.2

Program selection from PLC (retentive area) ……………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.3

Checkback signal: Program selection from HMI (retentive area) …………………………………..

115

A.7.7.4

Signals from HMI ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.5

Signals from PLC……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.6

Signals to maintenance planners………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.7

Signals from maintenance planners ………………………………………………………………………….

117

A.7.7.8

Signals from operator panel (retentive area) ………………………………………………………………

117

A.7.7.9

General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area)…………………………………………..

117

A.7.7.10

General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area)………………………………………………

118

A.7.8

Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel ……………………………………………………………..

118

A.7.8.1

Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

118

A.7.8.2

Decoded M signals (M0 to M99)……………………………………………………………………………….

119

A.7.8.3

Transferred T functions……………………………………………………………………………………………

119

A.7.8.4

Transferred M functions…………………………………………………………………………………………..

119

A.7.8.5

Transferred S functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.6

Transferred D functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.7

Transferred H functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9

NCK signals …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.1

General signals to NCK …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.2

General signals from NCK ……………………………………………………………………………………….

121

A.7.9.3

Signals at fast inputs and outputs……………………………………………………………………………..

121

A.7.9.4

Signals from fast inputs and outputs………………………………………………………………………….

122

A.7.10

Channel signals ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

123

A.7.10.1

Signals to NC channel …………………………………………………………………………………………….

123

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

5

Table of contents

A.7.10.2

Signals from NC channel ………………………………………………………………………………………..

125

A.7.11

Signals, synchronized actions………………………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.1

Signals, synchronized actions to channel………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.2

Signals, synchronized actions from channel………………………………………………………………

128

A.7.11.3

Reading and writing PLC variables…………………………………………………………………………..

129

A.7.12

Axis actual values and distance-to-go ………………………………………………………………………

129

A.7.13

Maintenance scheduler: User interface …………………………………………………………………….

130

A.7.13.1

Initial (start) data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.13.2

Actual data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.14

User interface for Ctrl-Energy ………………………………………………………………………………….

131

Index……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

133

Commissioning Manual

6

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

System overview

The SINUMERIK 808D is an economic CNC solution for milling and turning machines in the global market. For the turning variant, it is designed to control three axes, including two feed axes via two pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface. For the milling variant, it is designed to control four axes, including three feed axes via three pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface.

The following diagram shows a system configuration example for the SINUMERIK 808D control system:

Figure 1-1 SINUMERIK 808D control system overview (taking a milling machine for an example)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

7

Delivery check

Note

For a turning machine, you need two sets of setpoint cable + SINAMICS V60 drive + motor cable + brake cable (if necessary) + encoder cable + 1FL5 servomotor.

Legend

Name

Order number

1)

PPU141.1, turning

6FC5370-1AT00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AT00-0CA0 (Chinese)

PPU141.1, milling

6FC5370-1AM00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AM00-0CA0 (Chinese)

2)

MCP

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 (English)

6FC5303-0AF35-0CA0 (Chinese)

3)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to CPM60.1

6FC5548-0BA00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1BA0 (10 m)

4)

SINAMICS V60 Controlled Power Module

6SL3210-5CC14-0UA0 (4 A)

(CPM60.1)

6SL3210-5CC16-0UA0 (6 A)

6SL3210-5CC17-0UA0 (7 A)

6SL3210-5CC21-0UA0 (10 A)

5)

1FL5 Motor

1FL5060-0AC21-0AA0 (4 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AG0 (4 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AA0 (6 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AG0 (6 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AA0 (7.7 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AG0 (7.7 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AA0 (10 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AG0 (10 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AB0 (4 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AH0 (4 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AB0 (6 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AH0 (6 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AB0 (7.7 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AH0 (7.7 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AB0 (10 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AH0 (10 Nm, without key, with brake)

6)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to inverter or servo

6FC5548-0BA05-1AF0 (5 m)

spindle drive

6FC5548-0BA05-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA05-1BA0 (10 m)

7)

Motor cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-5LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-5LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

8)

Brake cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-2BR00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2BR00-1BA0 (10 m)

9)

Encoder cable (shielded)

6FX6002-2LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

10)

Inverter or servo spindle drive

From Siemens or a third-party manufacturer

Commissioning Manual

8

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

Check list

Table 1- 1

PPU package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

8

Connectors

• I/O connectors: 7

• 24 V power input connector: 1

Table 1- 2 MCP package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Machine Control Panel (MCP)

1

MCP connection cable (for connecting the MCP to the PPU, max. 50 cm)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

6

Pre-printed MCP strip, Milling

1 set of 6 pieces

Blank strip paper, A4 size

1

Product Information for MCP

1

Table 1- 3 CNC accessories

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Setpoint cable to SINAMICS V60 (for feed axis)

2 (turning) or 3 (milling)

Setpoint cable to Siemens inverter or third-party drive (for spindle)

1

Note

Emergency stop button is not included in our scope of delivery. You can, if necessary, contact your local Siemens salesperson for it.

Table 1- 4

SINAMICS V60 package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

SINAMICS V60

1

Getting Started

1

Cable clamps

2

Warranty Card

1

Table 1- 5

1FL5 motor package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

1FL5 motor

1

Data sheet for 1FL5 motor

1

Table 1- 6 Cables individually packaged

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Motor cable (unshielded)

1

Brake cable (unshielded)

1

Encoder cable (shielded)

1

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

9

Delivery check

Commissioning Manual

10

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

2.1Mounting the controller

Cut-out dimensions

Figure 2-1 Cut-out dimensions (in mm)

Note

Make sure there is enough space around the PPU and the MCP for tightening the screws in the control cabinet.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

11

Mounting

2.1 Mounting the controller

Mounting dimensions

Figure 2-2 Mounting dimensions for PPU (in mm)

Figure 2-3 Mounting dimensions for MCP (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

12

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Mounting clearance (in mm)

To ensure easy maintenance purpose, you must provide sufficient clearance (recommended distance: 80 mm) between the maintenance door and the cabinet wall for replacing the battery and CF card:

Cabinet panel

Maintenance door

2.2Mounting the drive

Cut-outs and mounting dimensions

Figure 2-4 4/6/7 A version (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

13

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Figure 2-5 10 A version (in mm)

Mounting method

With 4xM5 preassembled screws, the drive can be mounted vertically onto the inner panel of the cabinet. The maximum screw torque must be 2.0 Nm.

Minimum mounting clearance

To ensure adequate cooling, as a minimum, maintain the specified clearance between drives, one drive and another device/inner panel of the cabinet.

Figure 2-6 Drive mounting clearance (in mm)

Using the cable clamps supplied

If the CE marking requirements for cables are mandatory, the line supply cable and the motor cable used must all be shielded cables. In this case, you can use the cable clamps as a ground connection between the cable shield and a common ground point.

Clamps can also be helpful in better fixing cables (the unshielded motor cable and the line supply cable) in place.

Commissioning Manual

14

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

The illustration below shows you how to use the clamps to fix both cables and to make a shield connection with the cable.

Figure 2-7 Cable fixing with two cable clamps

CAUTION

Make sure that the clamp for fixing the shielded motor cable has a good contact with the cable shield.

Note

Siemens does not provide the shielded motor cable. Please prepare the shielded motor cable by yourselves for CE certification.

After the installation, it is recommended that the terminal screws should be checked to ensure that they are tight.

Reference

For further information about the drive mounting, refer to SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

15

Mounting

2.3 Mounting the motor

2.3Mounting the motor

Mounting dimensions (mm)

Motor type

A (in mm)

B (in mm)

4 Nm

163 (205)

80

6 Nm

181 (223)

90

7.7 Nm

195 (237)

112

10 Nm

219 (261)

136

Note

Value in brackets is the length of a motor with a built-in brake unit.

Motors with plain shaft have the same dimensions.

Reference

For further information about the motor, refer to 1FL5 Motor Technical Data.

Commissioning Manual

16

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3.1Interface overview

Interface overview on the Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

NOTICE

The + 24 V and M signals of X200 must be connected; otherwise, the communication between the PPU and the drives does not function as it should.

Figure 3-1 Interface layout

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

17

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X100, X101, X102

Digital inputs

X200, X201

Digital outputs

X21

FAST I/O

X301, X302

Distributed I/O

X10

Hand-wheel inputs

X60

Spindle encoder interface

X54

Analog spindle interface

X2

RS232 interface

X51, X52, X53

Pulse drive interfaces

X30

USB interface, for connection with the MCP

X1

Power supply interface, +24V DC power supply

Battery interface

Slot for the System CompactFlash Card (CF card)

Front

USB interface

Interface overview on the Machine Control Panel (MCP)

Figure 3-2 Interface layout

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X10

USB interface, for connection with the PPU

Commissioning Manual

18

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

3.2Connecting the battery

A battery has been pre-assembled on the back cover of the PPU.

The battery is not connected when delivered. You must plug the battery connector into the battery interface by yourself before switching the controller on. You can access it after removing the maintenance door:

Maintenance door

Battery interface

Battery

Battery connector

Note

When connecting the battery, ensure that the groove is at the upper side; otherwise, the alarm «NCK battery alarm» will be output after you switch on the controller, and you could lose your data after an unexpected power failure if you do not insert the battery connector correctly.

Note

Battery

Life time: 3 years

Replacement: do not replace the battery when the controller is switched off; otherwise, your data can be lost.

Order number: 6FC5247-0AA18-0AA0.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

19

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

3.3Connecting according to the default PLC program

The SINUMERIK 808D has integrated with a default PLC application. If you perform the commissioning work with the default PLC application, perform wiring as follows.

Connecting the digital inputs and outputs

Figure 3-3 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Milling)

Commissioning Manual

20

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-4 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Turning)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

21

siemens 808D Manual

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Connecting the distributed I/O

Figure 3-5 Connecting the distributed I/O

Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (take X51: axis X for an example)

Figure 3-6 Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (X51: axis X)

Commissioning Manual

22

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Note

Filter

A line filter (rated current: 16 A, protection level: IP20) is required so that the system can pass the CE certification (radiated emission test or conducted emission test). The order number of Siemens recommended filter is 6SN1111-0AA01-1BA1.

Note

Circuit breaker

You can install a mains linear breaker (rated current: 15 A for 7 A or 10 A version of the drive and 10 A for 4 A or 6 A version of the drive; rated voltage: 250 VAC) to protect the system.

Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive

Figure 3-7 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (unipolar)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

23

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-8 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (bipolar)

Note

Cables for connecting X21 must be shielded ones.

Connecting the handwheel

Figure 3-9 Connecting the handwheel

Commissioning Manual

24

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

3.4Connection Overview

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

25

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

Note

For the turning variant, connection to X52 is optional and depends upon whether you use the software option «additional axis». If you desire to configure the control system to control a rotary axis or an additional linear axis, connect X52 to a SINAMICS V60 which connects to a servo motor.

Commissioning Manual

26

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4

DANGER

Carrying out of repairs

Anywhere in the automation equipment where faults might cause physical injury or major material damage, in other words, where faults could be dangerous, additional external precautions must be taken, or facilities must be provided, that guarantee or enforce a safe operational state, even when there is a fault (e.g. using an independent limit value switch, mechanical locking mechanisms, EMERGENCY STOP/EMERGENCY OFF devices).

4.1Switching on controller

Before switching on

Make sure that:

You have finished the mechanical installation of the whole system based on the information included in the chapter «Mounting (Page 11)» or the Mechanical Installation Manual.

You have completed the wirings of the whole system according to the information included in the chapter «Connecting (Page 17)» (if you use the default PLC program) or the Electrical Installation Manual.

Switching on

Do as follows:

1.Power on the mains supply.

2.When the NC enters the main screen, check the NC normal status according to the status LEDs on the PPU.

POK: green RDY: green TEMP: unlit

For detailed information about the status LEDs, refer to the section «Status LEDs (Page 30)».

3.Check the drive normal status:

«S-run» is displayed.

LED «RDY/JOG»: green

LED «ERR»: dark

For detailed information about the SINAMICS V60 drives, refer to the SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

27

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.2 PPU keyboard function

4.2PPU keyboard function

Legend

Name

Description

Return key

Returns to higher level menu

Horizontal softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Extension key

Reserved. No function

Vertical softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Operating area keys

Opens the «MACHINE» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM» operating area

Opens the «OFFSET» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM MANAGER» operating area

• Opens the «ALARM» operating area

• Combines with the <SHIFT> key to open the

«SYSTEM» area

Opens the «CUSTOM» operating area

Commissioning Manual

28

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.3 MCP mode changeover

4.3MCP mode changeover

Use the machine control panel (MCP) to make changeover between the JOG mode, the Ref Point mode, the AUTO mode and the MDA mode.

The MCP key layout is shown below:

Legend

Name

Description

Mode navigation

Enters the Ref. Point mode for reference point approach

keys

Enters the JOG mode (manual operation)

Enters the AUTO mode (automatic operation)

Enters the MDA mode (manual program input and auto-

matic execution)

Incremental feed

Axis traverses at the increment of 1

keys

Axis traverses at the increment of 10

Axis traverses at the increment of 100

Axis traversing keys

Move an axis (X, Y, Z)

RESET key

Resets NC programs

Cancels alarms

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

29

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.4 Status LEDs

4.4Status LEDs

LEDs on the PPU

The following LEDs are installed on the SINUMERIK 808D PPU.

The individual LEDs and their functions are described in the table below.

Table 4- 1 Status and error displays

LED

Color

Significance

POK

Green

Power supply is OK.

RDY

Green

Ready for operation

TEMP

Yellow

Temperature exceeds the limit

For more information, refer to error description in the SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostics Manual.

LEDs on the SINAMICS V60 drives

Figure 4-1 SINAMICS V60 status LEDs

Commissioning Manual

30

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Table 4- 2 Description of the LED status

Status LED 1

Status LED 2

Description

7-segment LED display description

RDY/JOG

ERR

Green LED

Red LED

Dark

Dark

No 24 V DC Input/Drive Defect

Dark

Dark

Flashing at 1 Hz

Drive not ready

Current status

Green

Dark

Drive ready

Depends on the current menu opera-

tion

Dark

Red

Drvie error

Alarm code

Green

Red

Initialization

Display «8.8.8.8.8.8.»

Flashing at 1 Hz

Dark

JOG mode

Display «J-run»

4.5Password

4.5.1Access levels

Purpose

Access levels/passwords are necessary to prevent system data damages caused by unexpected mistake operations.

Cases

You must set a password for an access level under following cases:

Data restoring

Software update

Password has been deleted

A higher or lower access level is required

Access levels

The SINUMERIK 808D provides a concept of access levels for enabling data areas. You can view such information from the table below:

Table 4- 3 Access level

Access level

Default password

Target group

Manufacturer

SUNRISE

OEMs

Customer

CUSTOMER

End users

No password

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

31

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

With the access level «Manufacturer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying all the machine data

Commissioning work

With the access level «Customer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying part of the machine data

Programming

Setting offsets

Measuring tools

For the function areas listed below, the input and modification of data depends on the protection level you have set:

Tool offsets

Work offsets

Setting data

RS232 settings

Program creation / program correction

You can set the protection levels for these function areas via the display machine data (USER_CLASS…): «SYSTEM» operating area > «Mach. data» > «Expert list» > «Display MD».

Note

For detailed information about the display machine data, refer to the Parameter Manual.

Note

For detailed information about how to set the access levels, refer to Programming and Operating Manual.

Access levels: Manufacturer, Customer

Both access levels require a password.

You can change the password only after being activated with the access level «Manufacturer».

If you forget your password, you can carry out an NC start-up: «SYSTEM» operating area > «Start-up» > «NC» > «Power-up with default data». This will reset all passwords to their defaults according to the software release you have acquired.

Note

Before performing a start-up with default data, you must backup your data; otherwise, you will lose your data. For detailed information about how to do data backup, refer to section «Data backup (Page 75)».

Commissioning Manual

32

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Access level: No password

If you have deleted your password or do not set a password, you only have the access right of viewing above-mentioned function areas.

Note

The system has no password by default.

4.5.2Setting a password

The control system is delivered without a password. You must input the password of «SUNRISE» to perform the commissioning work.

Perform the following steps to input the password:

1.In the «SYSTEM» operating area (key combination: + ), press the vertical softkey «Set password». The message text at the bottom of the screen shows «No password set»:

2.Enter «SUNRISE» and press the «Accept» softkey.

3.The message text now shows «Access level: Manufacturer», which indicates that you have successfully set the password.

Note

You can change the default password to you by using the «Change password» softkey.

You can also delete the current password to protect your settings by pressing the «Delete password» softkey.

After the series production, you must press the «Delete password» softkey to exit the «Manufacturer» access level.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

33

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.6 Setting the date and time

4.6Setting the date and time

At delivery, the system date and time remain at the factory settings, and thus you must manually modify the date and time. Proceed as follows to set the date and time:

1.Press + to enter the «SYSTEM» operating area, then press the softkey «Date time».

2. Input your date and time.

3. Press the «OK» softkey to confirm your settings.

Commissioning Manual

34

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

4.7Introduction to the onboard assistants

The SINUMERIK 808D system software has three onboard assistants:

Startup assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you commission the prototype. With this assistant, you can complete basic machine tool functions.

Series assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you correctly finish the series machine commissioning.

Operation assistant (requires «Customer» access level)

This onboard assistant is designed to help you learn about the basic operations of the machining process.

Where can I find the assistants?

Press the <MENU FUNCTION> key on the PPU to call the assistants:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

35

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

How can I use the assistants?

Status indicators:

Completed task

Current task

Partially completed task group

Uncompleted task

Press one of the three softkeys to access the corresponding assistant

Press to start the assistant

Press to return to the main screen of the onboard assistants

Press any operating area key (CUSTOM excluded) to exit the main screen of the onboard assistants and enter the corresponding operating area

Press to enter the current task or a task that is prior to the current task

Note: This softkey becomes active when you move the cursor key to a valid task.

Commissioning Manual

36

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Commissioning diagram

5

You can commission the SINUMERIK 808D in two ways:

Alternative 1: with the onboard assistants

Alternative 2: without the onboard assistants

When commissioning with the onboard assistants, just follow the assistants step by step.

In this manual, only the second way is described. To do the commissioning work without the onboard assistants, proceed as follows:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

37

Commissioning diagram

Commissioning Manual

38

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6

6.1Turning

Overview of the PLC subroutines

Subroutine No.

Name

Description

0 to 19

Reserved for the manufacturer

20

AUX_MCP

Auxiliary function

21

AUX_LAMP

Lamp control, called in the subroutine «AUX_MCP».

31

PLC_ini_USR_INI

Reserved for the initialization by the manufacturer (this subroutine is automati-

cally called by subroutine 32)

32

PLC_INI

PLC initialization

33

EMG_STOP

Emergency Stop

37

MCP_NCK

Signals from the MCP and the HMI are sent to NCK interfaces

38

MCP_Tool_Nr

Display tool numbers via the LED of the MCP

39

HANDWHL

Handwheel selection via HMI

40

AXIS_CTL

Control of feed axis enable and spindle enable

41

MINI_HHU

Handwheel hand held unit

42

SPINDLE

Spindle function

43

MEAS_JOG

Tool measurement in the JOG mode

44

COOLING

Coolant control (Manual Machine key and M code: M07, M08, M09)

45

LUBRICATE

Lubrication control (interval and time)

46

PI_SERVICE

ASUP (Asynchronous Subroutine Program)

47

PLC_Select_PP

PLC selects a subroutine.

48

ServPlan

Service plan

49

Gear_Chg1_Auto

Automatic gear change of the spindle

50

Gear_Chg2_Virtual

Dummy gear change of the spindle

51

Turret1_HED_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: Hall element transistor, 4/6

position)

52

Turret2_BIN_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with codings)

53

Turret3_CODE_T

Hydraulic turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with

codings)

54

Turret2_3_ToolDir

Evaluate tool direction and calculate tool position (called by Turret2_BIN_T,

Turret3_CODE_T)

55

Tail_stock_T

Tail stock control

56

Lock_unlock_T

Clamp or release control

58

MM_MAIN

Manual machine

59

MM_MCP_808D

Spindle signal processing for the manual machine

61, 62

Reserved for the subroutine

63

TOGGLE

Six key-operated switches: K1 to K6

Two delay switches: k7, K8

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

39

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Definition of user-defined keys on the MCP

User-defined key 1

Working lamp

User-defined key 2

Manual cooling

User-defined key 3

Manual tool change

User-defined key 4

Manual chuck clamping and unclamping

User-defined key 5

Chuck clamping internally/externally

User-defined key 6

Tailstock

Structure of the sample application (OB1)

Call Conditions

Subroutine Name

Description

First scan (SM0.1)

PLC_INI (SBR32)

PLC initialization

Each scan (SM0.0)

EMG_STOP (SBR33)

Emergency Stop control

Each scan (SM0.0)

MCP_NCK (SBR37)

Transferring MCP and HMI signals to the NCK interface

Each scan (SM0.0)

HANDWHL (SBR39)

Selecting a hand wheel through the interface signal

DB1900.DBB1xxx

Each scan (SM0.0)

AXIS_CTL (SBR40)

Coordinate enabling control, hardware limit, etc.

Each scan (SM0.0)

COOLING (SBR44)

Cooling control

Each scan (SM0.0)

TURRET1 (SBR46)

HALL effect device turret control

Each scan (SM0.0)

ServPlan (SBR48)

Maintenance plan example: first task

PLC user alarms

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700010

DB1600.DBX1.2

HHU is active

SBR41: MINI_HHU

700011

DB1600.DBX1.3

Not able to lock tool in expected time

700012

DB1600.DBX1.4

Spindle in braking progress

SBR42: SPINDLE

700013

DB1600.DBX1.5

Operation while chuck is not locked

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

700014

DB1600.DBX1.6

Gear-change time out

SBR49: GearChg1_Auto

700015

DB1600.DBX1.7

Gear level position error

700016

DB1600.DBX2.0

Drives not ready

SBR33: EMG_STOP

700017

DB1600.DBX2.1

Operate chuck when spindle or part program is

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

running

700018

DB1600.DBX2.2

Cooling motor overload

SBR44: COOLING

700019

DB1600.DBX2.3

Coolant liquid position in low level

700020

DB1600.DBX2.4

Lubrication motor overload

SBR45: LUBRICAT

700021

DB1600.DBX2.5

Lubricant liquid position in low level

700022

DB1600.DBX2.6

Turret motor overload

SBR51: Turret1_HED_T

700023

DB1600.DBX2.7

Programmed tool number > max. turret on turret

SBR52: Turret2_BIN_T

number

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700024

DB1600.DBX3.0

Max. tool number setting error

700025

DB1600.DBX3.1

No position signals from turret

700026

DB1600.DBX3.2

Not able to find expected tool in monitor time

Commissioning Manual

40

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700027

DB1600.DBX3.3

Approach reference point again after rotation

SBR40: AXIS_CTL

monitoring

700028

DB1600.DBX3.4

Tool is not locked

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700049

DB1600.DBX6.1

Reference point X-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700050

DB1600.DBX6.2

Reference point Z-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700051

DB1600.DBX6.3

Wrong spindle direction started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700052

DB1600.DBX6.4

Watchdog timer JOG-program

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700053

DB1600.DBX6.5

Spindle override not 100%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700054

DB1600.DBX6.6

Spindle is not started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700055

DB1600.DBX6.7

Feed override = 0%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700056

DB1600.DBX7.0

Change of spindle direction not possible in

SBR58: MM_MAIN

thread

700059

DB1600.DBX7.3

Safe door not closed, NC start not possible

SBR22:

AUX_SAFE_DOOR

700060

DB1600.DBX7.4

Channel not in reset, change PRT not possible

SBR37: MCP_NCK

Relevant machine data

MD14510

Unit

Range

Function

Machine data — Integer

14510[12]

*

0 to 1

JOG key layout

14510[20]

2 to 64

The maximum number of tool positions

14510[21]

0.1s

5 to 30

Time for locking a turret

14510[22]

0.1s

30 to 300

The monitoring time for searching a tool

14510[24]

1 min

5 to 300

Lubrication interval

14510[25]

0.01s

100 to 2,000

Lubrication duration

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

41

Manual

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK 808D

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual

Valid for the following control systems:

SINUMERIK 808D Turning (software version: V4.4.2) SINUMERIK 808D Milling (software version: V4.4.2)

Target group:

Electrical engineers, calibration engineers and testing

12/2014

6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

1

Mounting

2

Connecting

3

Switching on and preparing

4

for commissioning

Commissioning diagram

5

Default PLC applications

6

Commissioning the prototype

7

Series production

8

Other frequently used

9

functions

Appendix

A

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

WARNING

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG

Order number: 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Copyright © Siemens AG 2012.

Industry Sector

01/2015 Subject to change

All rights reserved

Postfach 48 48

90026 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

Table of contents

1

Delivery check ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7

2

Mounting………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.1

Mounting the controller ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.2

Mounting the drive ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

13

2.3

Mounting the motor…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16

3

Connecting …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.1

Interface overview…………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.2

Connecting the battery………………………………………………………………………………………………

19

3.3

Connecting according to the default PLC program………………………………………………………..

20

3.4

Connection Overview………………………………………………………………………………………………..

25

4

Switching on and preparing for commissioning…………………………………………………………………………….

27

4.1

Switching on controller………………………………………………………………………………………………

27

4.2

PPU keyboard function ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

28

4.3

MCP mode changeover …………………………………………………………………………………………….

29

4.4

Status LEDs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

30

4.5

Password ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.1

Access levels …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.2

Setting a password …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

33

4.6

Setting the date and time…………………………………………………………………………………………..

34

4.7

Introduction to the onboard assistants…………………………………………………………………………

35

5

Commissioning diagram …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

37

6

Default PLC applications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

39

6.1

Turning……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

39

6.2

Milling……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

43

6.3

PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

46

6.3.1

General information ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.2

Alarm properties……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.3

Activating the PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………….

48

6.3.4

Editing a PLC user alarm text …………………………………………………………………………………….

50

7

Commissioning the prototype ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1

Commissioning the controller …………………………………………………………………………………….

55

7.1.1

Entering machine data………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1.2

Setting the axis-relevant parameters …………………………………………………………………………..

56

7.1.2.1

Enabling the position control………………………………………………………………………………………

56

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3

Table of contents

7.1.2.2

Setting the leadscrew pitch, deceleration ratio, and motor rotation direction

…………………… 56

7.1.2.3

Setting the axis speed and acceleration ……………………………………………………………………..

57

7.1.2.4

Setting the position — loop gain …………………………………………………………………………………….

57

7.1.3

Setting the spindle — relevant parameters ……………………………………………………………………..

58

7.1.4

Approaching the reference point ………………………………………………………………………………..

60

7.1.5

Compensation parameter settings ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.2

Setting backlash compensation …………………………………………………………………………………

62

7.1.5.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

63

7.1.5.4

Setting protection levels ……………………………………………………………………………………………

66

7.2

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

68

7.2.1

Creating a series archive ………………………………………………………………………………………….

68

7.2.2

Creating a start — up archive for the prototype ……………………………………………………………….

69

7.2.3

Restoring the control system with the start — up archive file …………………………………………….

71

8

Series production…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

73

8.1

Uploading the series archive for series commissioning …………………………………………………

73

8.2

Data settings for individual machine …………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.2

Setting the backlash …………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.2.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

75

8.3

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.3.1

Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.3.2

Creating an original status archive ……………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.3

Creating the start — up archive ……………………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.4

Restoring the control system …………………………………………………………………………………….

77

9

Other frequently used functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………

79

9.1

Playing a slide show ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

79

9.2

Defining the service planner ……………………………………………………………………………………..

81

9.3

Using the OEM startup screen and the OEM machine logo …………………………………………..

84

A

Appendix

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

87

A.1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

Cutting reserved holes

87

A.2 …………………………………………………………………

Inserting, printing or cutting the MCP strips

88

A.3 …………………………………………………………………..

Basic knowledge about NC programming

89

A.4 …………………………………………………………………………………….

Selection of the transformers

90

A.5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Parameter list

91

A.5.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Basic machine data

91

A.5.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS V60 parameters

95

A.6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Diagnostics

97

A.6.1 …………………………………………………………………………………………

SINUMERIK 808D alarms

97

A.6.2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS alarms

97

A.6.2.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Overview of alarms

97

A.6.2.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Alarm list

98

A.6.2.3 ……………………………………………………………………………………..

Errors during drive self — test

101

A.6.2.4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Other faults

102

Commissioning Manual

4

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397 — 4EP10 — 0BA0

Table of contents

A.6.2.5

Display data list………………………………………………………………………………………………………

102

A.7

PLC user interfaces ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

104

A.7.1

Addressing ranges………………………………………………………………………………………………….

104

A.7.2

MCP ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.1

Signals from MCP…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.2

Signals to MCP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

106

A.7.2.3

Reading/writing NC data: Job …………………………………………………………………………………..

107

A.7.2.4

Reading/writing NC data: Result……………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.5

PI service: Job ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.6

PI service: Result……………………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.3

Retentative data area ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4

User Alarms …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4.1

User alarms: Activating……………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.2

Variables for user alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.3

Active alarm response …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.4.4

Acknowledgement of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5

Axis/spindle signals…………………………………………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.1

Transferred M and S functions, axis specific………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.2

Signals to axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5.3

Signals from axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………

111

A.7.6

PLC machine data ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

114

A.7.6.1

INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT) ………………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.2

HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) ……………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.3

FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT)………………………………………………………

114

A.7.6.4

User alarm: Configuring (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM) ………………………………..

114

A.7.7

Signals from/to HMI ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.1

Program control signals from the HMI (retentive area) (also refer to signals at channel

DB3200)………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.2

Program selection from PLC (retentive area) ……………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.3

Checkback signal: Program selection from HMI (retentive area) …………………………………..

115

A.7.7.4

Signals from HMI ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.5

Signals from PLC……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.6

Signals to maintenance planners………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.7

Signals from maintenance planners ………………………………………………………………………….

117

A.7.7.8

Signals from operator panel (retentive area) ………………………………………………………………

117

A.7.7.9

General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area)…………………………………………..

117

A.7.7.10

General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area)………………………………………………

118

A.7.8

Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel ……………………………………………………………..

118

A.7.8.1

Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

118

A.7.8.2

Decoded M signals (M0 to M99)……………………………………………………………………………….

119

A.7.8.3

Transferred T functions……………………………………………………………………………………………

119

A.7.8.4

Transferred M functions…………………………………………………………………………………………..

119

A.7.8.5

Transferred S functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.6

Transferred D functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.7

Transferred H functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9

NCK signals …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.1

General signals to NCK …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.2

General signals from NCK ……………………………………………………………………………………….

121

A.7.9.3

Signals at fast inputs and outputs……………………………………………………………………………..

121

A.7.9.4

Signals from fast inputs and outputs………………………………………………………………………….

122

A.7.10

Channel signals ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

123

A.7.10.1

Signals to NC channel …………………………………………………………………………………………….

123

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

5

Table of contents

A.7.10.2

Signals from NC channel ………………………………………………………………………………………..

125

A.7.11

Signals, synchronized actions………………………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.1

Signals, synchronized actions to channel………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.2

Signals, synchronized actions from channel………………………………………………………………

128

A.7.11.3

Reading and writing PLC variables…………………………………………………………………………..

129

A.7.12

Axis actual values and distance-to-go ………………………………………………………………………

129

A.7.13

Maintenance scheduler: User interface …………………………………………………………………….

130

A.7.13.1

Initial (start) data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.13.2

Actual data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.14

User interface for Ctrl-Energy ………………………………………………………………………………….

131

Index……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

133

Commissioning Manual

6

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

System overview

The SINUMERIK 808D is an economic CNC solution for milling and turning machines in the global market. For the turning variant, it is designed to control three axes, including two feed axes via two pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface. For the milling variant, it is designed to control four axes, including three feed axes via three pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface.

The following diagram shows a system configuration example for the SINUMERIK 808D control system:

Figure 1-1 SINUMERIK 808D control system overview (taking a milling machine for an example)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

7

Delivery check

Note

For a turning machine, you need two sets of setpoint cable + SINAMICS V60 drive + motor cable + brake cable (if necessary) + encoder cable + 1FL5 servomotor.

Legend

Name

Order number

1)

PPU141.1, turning

6FC5370-1AT00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AT00-0CA0 (Chinese)

PPU141.1, milling

6FC5370-1AM00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AM00-0CA0 (Chinese)

2)

MCP

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 (English)

6FC5303-0AF35-0CA0 (Chinese)

3)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to CPM60.1

6FC5548-0BA00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1BA0 (10 m)

4)

SINAMICS V60 Controlled Power Module

6SL3210-5CC14-0UA0 (4 A)

(CPM60.1)

6SL3210-5CC16-0UA0 (6 A)

6SL3210-5CC17-0UA0 (7 A)

6SL3210-5CC21-0UA0 (10 A)

5)

1FL5 Motor

1FL5060-0AC21-0AA0 (4 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AG0 (4 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AA0 (6 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AG0 (6 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AA0 (7.7 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AG0 (7.7 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AA0 (10 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AG0 (10 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AB0 (4 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AH0 (4 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AB0 (6 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AH0 (6 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AB0 (7.7 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AH0 (7.7 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AB0 (10 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AH0 (10 Nm, without key, with brake)

6)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to inverter or servo

6FC5548-0BA05-1AF0 (5 m)

spindle drive

6FC5548-0BA05-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA05-1BA0 (10 m)

7)

Motor cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-5LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-5LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

Brake cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-2BR00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2BR00-1BA0 (10 m)

9)

Encoder cable (shielded)

6FX6002-2LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

10)

Inverter or servo spindle drive

From Siemens or a third-party manufacturer

Commissioning Manual

8

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

Check list

Table 1- 1

PPU package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

8

Connectors

• I/O connectors: 7

• 24 V power input connector: 1

Table 1- 2 MCP package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Machine Control Panel (MCP)

1

MCP connection cable (for connecting the MCP to the PPU, max. 50 cm)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

6

Pre-printed MCP strip, Milling

1 set of 6 pieces

Blank strip paper, A4 size

1

Product Information for MCP

1

Table 1- 3 CNC accessories

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Setpoint cable to SINAMICS V60 (for feed axis)

2 (turning) or 3 (milling)

Setpoint cable to Siemens inverter or third-party drive (for spindle)

1

Note

Emergency stop button is not included in our scope of delivery. You can, if necessary, contact your local Siemens salesperson for it.

Table 1- 4

SINAMICS V60 package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

SINAMICS V60

1

Getting Started

1

Cable clamps

2

Warranty Card

1

Table 1- 5

1FL5 motor package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

1FL5 motor

1

Data sheet for 1FL5 motor

1

Table 1- 6 Cables individually packaged

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Motor cable (unshielded)

1

Brake cable (unshielded)

1

Encoder cable (shielded)

1

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

9

Delivery check

Commissioning Manual

10

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

2.1Mounting the controller

Cut-out dimensions

Figure 2-1 Cut-out dimensions (in mm)

Note

Make sure there is enough space around the PPU and the MCP for tightening the screws in the control cabinet.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

11

Mounting

2.1 Mounting the controller

Mounting dimensions

Figure 2-2 Mounting dimensions for PPU (in mm)

Figure 2-3 Mounting dimensions for MCP (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

12

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Mounting clearance (in mm)

To ensure easy maintenance purpose, you must provide sufficient clearance (recommended distance: 80 mm) between the maintenance door and the cabinet wall for replacing the battery and CF card:

Cabinet panel

Maintenance door

2.2Mounting the drive

Cut-outs and mounting dimensions

Figure 2-4 4/6/7 A version (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

13

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Figure 2-5 10 A version (in mm)

Mounting method

With 4xM5 preassembled screws, the drive can be mounted vertically onto the inner panel of the cabinet. The maximum screw torque must be 2.0 Nm.

Minimum mounting clearance

To ensure adequate cooling, as a minimum, maintain the specified clearance between drives, one drive and another device/inner panel of the cabinet.

Figure 2-6 Drive mounting clearance (in mm)

Using the cable clamps supplied

If the CE marking requirements for cables are mandatory, the line supply cable and the motor cable used must all be shielded cables. In this case, you can use the cable clamps as a ground connection between the cable shield and a common ground point.

Clamps can also be helpful in better fixing cables (the unshielded motor cable and the line supply cable) in place.

Commissioning Manual

14

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

The illustration below shows you how to use the clamps to fix both cables and to make a shield connection with the cable.

Figure 2-7 Cable fixing with two cable clamps

CAUTION

Make sure that the clamp for fixing the shielded motor cable has a good contact with the cable shield.

Note

Siemens does not provide the shielded motor cable. Please prepare the shielded motor cable by yourselves for CE certification.

After the installation, it is recommended that the terminal screws should be checked to ensure that they are tight.

Reference

For further information about the drive mounting, refer to SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

15

Mounting

2.3 Mounting the motor

2.3Mounting the motor

Mounting dimensions (mm)

Motor type

A (in mm)

B (in mm)

4 Nm

163 (205)

80

6 Nm

181 (223)

90

7.7 Nm

195 (237)

112

10 Nm

219 (261)

136

Note

Value in brackets is the length of a motor with a built-in brake unit.

Motors with plain shaft have the same dimensions.

Reference

For further information about the motor, refer to 1FL5 Motor Technical Data.

Commissioning Manual

16

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3.1Interface overview

Interface overview on the Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

NOTICE

The + 24 V and M signals of X200 must be connected; otherwise, the communication between the PPU and the drives does not function as it should.

Figure 3-1 Interface layout

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

17

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X100, X101, X102

Digital inputs

X200, X201

Digital outputs

X21

FAST I/O

X301, X302

Distributed I/O

X10

Hand-wheel inputs

X60

Spindle encoder interface

X54

Analog spindle interface

X2

RS232 interface

X51, X52, X53

Pulse drive interfaces

X30

USB interface, for connection with the MCP

X1

Power supply interface, +24V DC power supply

Battery interface

Slot for the System CompactFlash Card (CF card)

Front

USB interface

Interface overview on the Machine Control Panel (MCP)

Figure 3-2 Interface layout

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X10

USB interface, for connection with the PPU

Commissioning Manual

18

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

3.2Connecting the battery

A battery has been pre-assembled on the back cover of the PPU.

The battery is not connected when delivered. You must plug the battery connector into the battery interface by yourself before switching the controller on. You can access it after removing the maintenance door:

Maintenance door

Battery interface

Battery

Battery connector

Note

When connecting the battery, ensure that the groove is at the upper side; otherwise, the alarm «NCK battery alarm» will be output after you switch on the controller, and you could lose your data after an unexpected power failure if you do not insert the battery connector correctly.

Note

Battery

Life time: 3 years

Replacement: do not replace the battery when the controller is switched off; otherwise, your data can be lost.

Order number: 6FC5247-0AA18-0AA0.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

19

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

3.3Connecting according to the default PLC program

The SINUMERIK 808D has integrated with a default PLC application. If you perform the commissioning work with the default PLC application, perform wiring as follows.

Connecting the digital inputs and outputs

Figure 3-3 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Milling)

Commissioning Manual

20

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-4 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Turning)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

21

siemens 808D Manual

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Connecting the distributed I/O

Figure 3-5 Connecting the distributed I/O

Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (take X51: axis X for an example)

Figure 3-6 Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (X51: axis X)

Commissioning Manual

22

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Note

Filter

A line filter (rated current: 16 A, protection level: IP20) is required so that the system can pass the CE certification (radiated emission test or conducted emission test). The order number of Siemens recommended filter is 6SN1111-0AA01-1BA1.

Note

Circuit breaker

You can install a mains linear breaker (rated current: 15 A for 7 A or 10 A version of the drive and 10 A for 4 A or 6 A version of the drive; rated voltage: 250 VAC) to protect the system.

Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive

Figure 3-7 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (unipolar)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

23

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-8 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (bipolar)

Note

Cables for connecting X21 must be shielded ones.

Connecting the handwheel

Figure 3-9 Connecting the handwheel

Commissioning Manual

24

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

3.4Connection Overview

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

25

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

Note

For the turning variant, connection to X52 is optional and depends upon whether you use the software option «additional axis». If you desire to configure the control system to control a rotary axis or an additional linear axis, connect X52 to a SINAMICS V60 which connects to a servo motor.

Commissioning Manual

26

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4

DANGER

Carrying out of repairs

Anywhere in the automation equipment where faults might cause physical injury or major material damage, in other words, where faults could be dangerous, additional external precautions must be taken, or facilities must be provided, that guarantee or enforce a safe operational state, even when there is a fault (e.g. using an independent limit value switch, mechanical locking mechanisms, EMERGENCY STOP/EMERGENCY OFF devices).

4.1Switching on controller

Before switching on

Make sure that:

You have finished the mechanical installation of the whole system based on the information included in the chapter «Mounting (Page 11)» or the Mechanical Installation Manual.

You have completed the wirings of the whole system according to the information included in the chapter «Connecting (Page 17)» (if you use the default PLC program) or the Electrical Installation Manual.

Switching on

Do as follows:

1.Power on the mains supply.

2.When the NC enters the main screen, check the NC normal status according to the status LEDs on the PPU.

POK: green RDY: green TEMP: unlit

For detailed information about the status LEDs, refer to the section «Status LEDs (Page 30)».

3.Check the drive normal status:

«S-run» is displayed.

LED «RDY/JOG»: green

LED «ERR»: dark

For detailed information about the SINAMICS V60 drives, refer to the SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

27

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.2 PPU keyboard function

4.2PPU keyboard function

Legend

Name

Description

Return key

Returns to higher level menu

Horizontal softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Extension key

Reserved. No function

Vertical softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Operating area keys

Opens the «MACHINE» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM» operating area

Opens the «OFFSET» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM MANAGER» operating area

• Opens the «ALARM» operating area

• Combines with the <SHIFT> key to open the

«SYSTEM» area

Opens the «CUSTOM» operating area

Commissioning Manual

28

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.3 MCP mode changeover

4.3MCP mode changeover

Use the machine control panel (MCP) to make changeover between the JOG mode, the Ref Point mode, the AUTO mode and the MDA mode.

The MCP key layout is shown below:

Legend

Name

Description

Mode navigation

Enters the Ref. Point mode for reference point approach

keys

Enters the JOG mode (manual operation)

Enters the AUTO mode (automatic operation)

Enters the MDA mode (manual program input and auto-

matic execution)

Incremental feed

Axis traverses at the increment of 1

keys

Axis traverses at the increment of 10

Axis traverses at the increment of 100

Axis traversing keys

Move an axis (X, Y, Z)

RESET key

Resets NC programs

Cancels alarms

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

29

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.4 Status LEDs

4.4Status LEDs

LEDs on the PPU

The following LEDs are installed on the SINUMERIK 808D PPU.

The individual LEDs and their functions are described in the table below.

Table 4- 1 Status and error displays

LED

Color

Significance

POK

Green

Power supply is OK.

RDY

Green

Ready for operation

TEMP

Yellow

Temperature exceeds the limit

For more information, refer to error description in the SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostics Manual.

LEDs on the SINAMICS V60 drives

Figure 4-1 SINAMICS V60 status LEDs

Commissioning Manual

30

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Table 4- 2 Description of the LED status

Status LED 1

Status LED 2

Description

7-segment LED display description

RDY/JOG

ERR

Green LED

Red LED

Dark

Dark

No 24 V DC Input/Drive Defect

Dark

Dark

Flashing at 1 Hz

Drive not ready

Current status

Green

Dark

Drive ready

Depends on the current menu opera-

tion

Dark

Red

Drvie error

Alarm code

Green

Red

Initialization

Display «8.8.8.8.8.8.»

Flashing at 1 Hz

Dark

JOG mode

Display «J-run»

4.5Password

4.5.1Access levels

Purpose

Access levels/passwords are necessary to prevent system data damages caused by unexpected mistake operations.

Cases

You must set a password for an access level under following cases:

Data restoring

Software update

Password has been deleted

A higher or lower access level is required

Access levels

The SINUMERIK 808D provides a concept of access levels for enabling data areas. You can view such information from the table below:

Table 4- 3 Access level

Access level

Default password

Target group

Manufacturer

SUNRISE

OEMs

Customer

CUSTOMER

End users

No password

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

31

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

With the access level «Manufacturer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying all the machine data

Commissioning work

With the access level «Customer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying part of the machine data

Programming

Setting offsets

Measuring tools

For the function areas listed below, the input and modification of data depends on the protection level you have set:

Tool offsets

Work offsets

Setting data

RS232 settings

Program creation / program correction

You can set the protection levels for these function areas via the display machine data (USER_CLASS…): «SYSTEM» operating area > «Mach. data» > «Expert list» > «Display MD».

Note

For detailed information about the display machine data, refer to the Parameter Manual.

Note

For detailed information about how to set the access levels, refer to Programming and Operating Manual.

Access levels: Manufacturer, Customer

Both access levels require a password.

You can change the password only after being activated with the access level «Manufacturer».

If you forget your password, you can carry out an NC start-up: «SYSTEM» operating area > «Start-up» > «NC» > «Power-up with default data». This will reset all passwords to their defaults according to the software release you have acquired.

Note

Before performing a start-up with default data, you must backup your data; otherwise, you will lose your data. For detailed information about how to do data backup, refer to section «Data backup (Page 75)».

Commissioning Manual

32

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Access level: No password

If you have deleted your password or do not set a password, you only have the access right of viewing above-mentioned function areas.

Note

The system has no password by default.

4.5.2Setting a password

The control system is delivered without a password. You must input the password of «SUNRISE» to perform the commissioning work.

Perform the following steps to input the password:

1.In the «SYSTEM» operating area (key combination: + ), press the vertical softkey «Set password». The message text at the bottom of the screen shows «No password set»:

2.Enter «SUNRISE» and press the «Accept» softkey.

3.The message text now shows «Access level: Manufacturer», which indicates that you have successfully set the password.

Note

You can change the default password to you by using the «Change password» softkey.

You can also delete the current password to protect your settings by pressing the «Delete password» softkey.

After the series production, you must press the «Delete password» softkey to exit the «Manufacturer» access level.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

33

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.6 Setting the date and time

4.6Setting the date and time

At delivery, the system date and time remain at the factory settings, and thus you must manually modify the date and time. Proceed as follows to set the date and time:

1.Press + to enter the «SYSTEM» operating area, then press the softkey «Date time».

2. Input your date and time.

3. Press the «OK» softkey to confirm your settings.

Commissioning Manual

34

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

4.7Introduction to the onboard assistants

The SINUMERIK 808D system software has three onboard assistants:

Startup assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you commission the prototype. With this assistant, you can complete basic machine tool functions.

Series assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you correctly finish the series machine commissioning.

Operation assistant (requires «Customer» access level)

This onboard assistant is designed to help you learn about the basic operations of the machining process.

Where can I find the assistants?

Press the <MENU FUNCTION> key on the PPU to call the assistants:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

35

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

How can I use the assistants?

Status indicators:

Completed task

Current task

Partially completed task group

Uncompleted task

Press one of the three softkeys to access the corresponding assistant

Press to start the assistant

Press to return to the main screen of the onboard assistants

Press any operating area key (CUSTOM excluded) to exit the main screen of the onboard assistants and enter the corresponding operating area

Press to enter the current task or a task that is prior to the current task

Note: This softkey becomes active when you move the cursor key to a valid task.

Commissioning Manual

36

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Commissioning diagram

5

You can commission the SINUMERIK 808D in two ways:

Alternative 1: with the onboard assistants

Alternative 2: without the onboard assistants

When commissioning with the onboard assistants, just follow the assistants step by step.

In this manual, only the second way is described. To do the commissioning work without the onboard assistants, proceed as follows:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

37

Commissioning diagram

Commissioning Manual

38

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6

6.1Turning

Overview of the PLC subroutines

Subroutine No.

Name

Description

0 to 19

Reserved for the manufacturer

20

AUX_MCP

Auxiliary function

21

AUX_LAMP

Lamp control, called in the subroutine «AUX_MCP».

31

PLC_ini_USR_INI

Reserved for the initialization by the manufacturer (this subroutine is automati-

cally called by subroutine 32)

32

PLC_INI

PLC initialization

33

EMG_STOP

Emergency Stop

37

MCP_NCK

Signals from the MCP and the HMI are sent to NCK interfaces

38

MCP_Tool_Nr

Display tool numbers via the LED of the MCP

39

HANDWHL

Handwheel selection via HMI

40

AXIS_CTL

Control of feed axis enable and spindle enable

41

MINI_HHU

Handwheel hand held unit

42

SPINDLE

Spindle function

43

MEAS_JOG

Tool measurement in the JOG mode

44

COOLING

Coolant control (Manual Machine key and M code: M07, M08, M09)

45

LUBRICATE

Lubrication control (interval and time)

46

PI_SERVICE

ASUP (Asynchronous Subroutine Program)

47

PLC_Select_PP

PLC selects a subroutine.

48

ServPlan

Service plan

49

Gear_Chg1_Auto

Automatic gear change of the spindle

50

Gear_Chg2_Virtual

Dummy gear change of the spindle

51

Turret1_HED_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: Hall element transistor, 4/6

position)

52

Turret2_BIN_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with codings)

53

Turret3_CODE_T

Hydraulic turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with

codings)

54

Turret2_3_ToolDir

Evaluate tool direction and calculate tool position (called by Turret2_BIN_T,

Turret3_CODE_T)

55

Tail_stock_T

Tail stock control

56

Lock_unlock_T

Clamp or release control

58

MM_MAIN

Manual machine

59

MM_MCP_808D

Spindle signal processing for the manual machine

61, 62

Reserved for the subroutine

63

TOGGLE

Six key-operated switches: K1 to K6

Two delay switches: k7, K8

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

39

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Definition of user-defined keys on the MCP

User-defined key 1

Working lamp

User-defined key 2

Manual cooling

User-defined key 3

Manual tool change

User-defined key 4

Manual chuck clamping and unclamping

User-defined key 5

Chuck clamping internally/externally

User-defined key 6

Tailstock

Structure of the sample application (OB1)

Call Conditions

Subroutine Name

Description

First scan (SM0.1)

PLC_INI (SBR32)

PLC initialization

Each scan (SM0.0)

EMG_STOP (SBR33)

Emergency Stop control

Each scan (SM0.0)

MCP_NCK (SBR37)

Transferring MCP and HMI signals to the NCK interface

Each scan (SM0.0)

HANDWHL (SBR39)

Selecting a hand wheel through the interface signal

DB1900.DBB1xxx

Each scan (SM0.0)

AXIS_CTL (SBR40)

Coordinate enabling control, hardware limit, etc.

Each scan (SM0.0)

COOLING (SBR44)

Cooling control

Each scan (SM0.0)

TURRET1 (SBR46)

HALL effect device turret control

Each scan (SM0.0)

ServPlan (SBR48)

Maintenance plan example: first task

PLC user alarms

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700010

DB1600.DBX1.2

HHU is active

SBR41: MINI_HHU

700011

DB1600.DBX1.3

Not able to lock tool in expected time

700012

DB1600.DBX1.4

Spindle in braking progress

SBR42: SPINDLE

700013

DB1600.DBX1.5

Operation while chuck is not locked

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

700014

DB1600.DBX1.6

Gear-change time out

SBR49: GearChg1_Auto

700015

DB1600.DBX1.7

Gear level position error

700016

DB1600.DBX2.0

Drives not ready

SBR33: EMG_STOP

700017

DB1600.DBX2.1

Operate chuck when spindle or part program is

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

running

700018

DB1600.DBX2.2

Cooling motor overload

SBR44: COOLING

700019

DB1600.DBX2.3

Coolant liquid position in low level

700020

DB1600.DBX2.4

Lubrication motor overload

SBR45: LUBRICAT

700021

DB1600.DBX2.5

Lubricant liquid position in low level

700022

DB1600.DBX2.6

Turret motor overload

SBR51: Turret1_HED_T

700023

DB1600.DBX2.7

Programmed tool number > max. turret on turret

SBR52: Turret2_BIN_T

number

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700024

DB1600.DBX3.0

Max. tool number setting error

700025

DB1600.DBX3.1

No position signals from turret

700026

DB1600.DBX3.2

Not able to find expected tool in monitor time

Commissioning Manual

40

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700027

DB1600.DBX3.3

Approach reference point again after rotation

SBR40: AXIS_CTL

monitoring

700028

DB1600.DBX3.4

Tool is not locked

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700049

DB1600.DBX6.1

Reference point X-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700050

DB1600.DBX6.2

Reference point Z-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700051

DB1600.DBX6.3

Wrong spindle direction started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700052

DB1600.DBX6.4

Watchdog timer JOG-program

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700053

DB1600.DBX6.5

Spindle override not 100%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700054

DB1600.DBX6.6

Spindle is not started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700055

DB1600.DBX6.7

Feed override = 0%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700056

DB1600.DBX7.0

Change of spindle direction not possible in

SBR58: MM_MAIN

thread

700059

DB1600.DBX7.3

Safe door not closed, NC start not possible

SBR22:

AUX_SAFE_DOOR

700060

DB1600.DBX7.4

Channel not in reset, change PRT not possible

SBR37: MCP_NCK

Relevant machine data

MD14510

Unit

Range

Function

Machine data — Integer

14510[12]

*

0 to 1

JOG key layout

14510[20]

2 to 64

The maximum number of tool positions

14510[21]

0.1s

5 to 30

Time for locking a turret

14510[22]

0.1s

30 to 300

The monitoring time for searching a tool

14510[24]

1 min

5 to 300

Lubrication interval

14510[25]

0.01s

100 to 2,000

Lubrication duration

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

41

Manual

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK 808D

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual

Valid for the following control systems:

SINUMERIK 808D Turning (software version: V4.4.2) SINUMERIK 808D Milling (software version: V4.4.2)

Target group:

Electrical engineers, calibration engineers and testing

12/2014

6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

1

Mounting

2

Connecting

3

Switching on and preparing

4

for commissioning

Commissioning diagram

5

Default PLC applications

6

Commissioning the prototype

7

Series production

8

Other frequently used

9

functions

Appendix

A

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

WARNING

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG

Order number: 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Copyright © Siemens AG 2012.

Industry Sector

01/2015 Subject to change

All rights reserved

Postfach 48 48

90026 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

Table of contents

1

Delivery check ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

7

2

Mounting………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.1

Mounting the controller ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

11

2.2

Mounting the drive ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

13

2.3

Mounting the motor…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

16

3

Connecting …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.1

Interface overview…………………………………………………………………………………………………….

17

3.2

Connecting the battery………………………………………………………………………………………………

19

3.3

Connecting according to the default PLC program………………………………………………………..

20

3.4

Connection Overview………………………………………………………………………………………………..

25

4

Switching on and preparing for commissioning…………………………………………………………………………….

27

4.1

Switching on controller………………………………………………………………………………………………

27

4.2

PPU keyboard function ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

28

4.3

MCP mode changeover …………………………………………………………………………………………….

29

4.4

Status LEDs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

30

4.5

Password ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.1

Access levels …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

4.5.2

Setting a password …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

33

4.6

Setting the date and time…………………………………………………………………………………………..

34

4.7

Introduction to the onboard assistants…………………………………………………………………………

35

5

Commissioning diagram …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

37

6

Default PLC applications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

39

6.1

Turning……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

39

6.2

Milling……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

43

6.3

PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

46

6.3.1

General information ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.2

Alarm properties……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

46

6.3.3

Activating the PLC user alarms ………………………………………………………………………………….

48

6.3.4

Editing a PLC user alarm text …………………………………………………………………………………….

50

7

Commissioning the prototype ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1

Commissioning the controller …………………………………………………………………………………….

55

7.1.1

Entering machine data………………………………………………………………………………………………

55

7.1.2

Setting the axis-relevant parameters …………………………………………………………………………..

56

7.1.2.1

Enabling the position control………………………………………………………………………………………

56

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3

Table of contents

7.1.2.2

Setting the leadscrew pitch, deceleration ratio, and motor rotation direction

…………………… 56

7.1.2.3

Setting the axis speed and acceleration ……………………………………………………………………..

57

7.1.2.4

Setting the position — loop gain …………………………………………………………………………………….

57

7.1.3

Setting the spindle — relevant parameters ……………………………………………………………………..

58

7.1.4

Approaching the reference point ………………………………………………………………………………..

60

7.1.5

Compensation parameter settings ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

62

7.1.5.2

Setting backlash compensation …………………………………………………………………………………

62

7.1.5.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

63

7.1.5.4

Setting protection levels ……………………………………………………………………………………………

66

7.2

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

68

7.2.1

Creating a series archive ………………………………………………………………………………………….

68

7.2.2

Creating a start — up archive for the prototype ……………………………………………………………….

69

7.2.3

Restoring the control system with the start — up archive file …………………………………………….

71

8

Series production…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

73

8.1

Uploading the series archive for series commissioning …………………………………………………

73

8.2

Data settings for individual machine …………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.1

Setting the software limit switches ……………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.2.2

Setting the backlash …………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.2.3

Making leadscrew error compensation ……………………………………………………………………….

75

8.3

Data backup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

75

8.3.1

Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

75

8.3.2

Creating an original status archive ……………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.3

Creating the start — up archive ……………………………………………………………………………………..

76

8.3.4

Restoring the control system …………………………………………………………………………………….

77

9

Other frequently used functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………

79

9.1

Playing a slide show ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

79

9.2

Defining the service planner ……………………………………………………………………………………..

81

9.3

Using the OEM startup screen and the OEM machine logo …………………………………………..

84

A

Appendix

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

87

A.1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

Cutting reserved holes

87

A.2 …………………………………………………………………

Inserting, printing or cutting the MCP strips

88

A.3 …………………………………………………………………..

Basic knowledge about NC programming

89

A.4 …………………………………………………………………………………….

Selection of the transformers

90

A.5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Parameter list

91

A.5.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Basic machine data

91

A.5.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS V60 parameters

95

A.6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Diagnostics

97

A.6.1 …………………………………………………………………………………………

SINUMERIK 808D alarms

97

A.6.2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

SINAMICS alarms

97

A.6.2.1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Overview of alarms

97

A.6.2.2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Alarm list

98

A.6.2.3 ……………………………………………………………………………………..

Errors during drive self — test

101

A.6.2.4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Other faults

102

Commissioning Manual

4

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397 — 4EP10 — 0BA0

Table of contents

A.6.2.5

Display data list………………………………………………………………………………………………………

102

A.7

PLC user interfaces ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

104

A.7.1

Addressing ranges………………………………………………………………………………………………….

104

A.7.2

MCP ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.1

Signals from MCP…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

106

A.7.2.2

Signals to MCP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

106

A.7.2.3

Reading/writing NC data: Job …………………………………………………………………………………..

107

A.7.2.4

Reading/writing NC data: Result……………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.5

PI service: Job ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….

107

A.7.2.6

PI service: Result……………………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.3

Retentative data area ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4

User Alarms …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

108

A.7.4.1

User alarms: Activating……………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.2

Variables for user alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………

108

A.7.4.3

Active alarm response …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.4.4

Acknowledgement of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5

Axis/spindle signals…………………………………………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.1

Transferred M and S functions, axis specific………………………………………………………………

109

A.7.5.2

Signals to axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………….

109

A.7.5.3

Signals from axis/spindle …………………………………………………………………………………………

111

A.7.6

PLC machine data ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

114

A.7.6.1

INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT) ………………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.2

HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) ……………………………………………………………..

114

A.7.6.3

FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT)………………………………………………………

114

A.7.6.4

User alarm: Configuring (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM) ………………………………..

114

A.7.7

Signals from/to HMI ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.1

Program control signals from the HMI (retentive area) (also refer to signals at channel

DB3200)………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.2

Program selection from PLC (retentive area) ……………………………………………………………..

115

A.7.7.3

Checkback signal: Program selection from HMI (retentive area) …………………………………..

115

A.7.7.4

Signals from HMI ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.5

Signals from PLC……………………………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.6

Signals to maintenance planners………………………………………………………………………………

116

A.7.7.7

Signals from maintenance planners ………………………………………………………………………….

117

A.7.7.8

Signals from operator panel (retentive area) ………………………………………………………………

117

A.7.7.9

General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area)…………………………………………..

117

A.7.7.10

General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area)………………………………………………

118

A.7.8

Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel ……………………………………………………………..

118

A.7.8.1

Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

118

A.7.8.2

Decoded M signals (M0 to M99)……………………………………………………………………………….

119

A.7.8.3

Transferred T functions……………………………………………………………………………………………

119

A.7.8.4

Transferred M functions…………………………………………………………………………………………..

119

A.7.8.5

Transferred S functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.6

Transferred D functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.8.7

Transferred H functions …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9

NCK signals …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.1

General signals to NCK …………………………………………………………………………………………..

120

A.7.9.2

General signals from NCK ……………………………………………………………………………………….

121

A.7.9.3

Signals at fast inputs and outputs……………………………………………………………………………..

121

A.7.9.4

Signals from fast inputs and outputs………………………………………………………………………….

122

A.7.10

Channel signals ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

123

A.7.10.1

Signals to NC channel …………………………………………………………………………………………….

123

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

5

Table of contents

A.7.10.2

Signals from NC channel ………………………………………………………………………………………..

125

A.7.11

Signals, synchronized actions………………………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.1

Signals, synchronized actions to channel………………………………………………………………….

128

A.7.11.2

Signals, synchronized actions from channel………………………………………………………………

128

A.7.11.3

Reading and writing PLC variables…………………………………………………………………………..

129

A.7.12

Axis actual values and distance-to-go ………………………………………………………………………

129

A.7.13

Maintenance scheduler: User interface …………………………………………………………………….

130

A.7.13.1

Initial (start) data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.13.2

Actual data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

130

A.7.14

User interface for Ctrl-Energy ………………………………………………………………………………….

131

Index……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

133

Commissioning Manual

6

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

System overview

The SINUMERIK 808D is an economic CNC solution for milling and turning machines in the global market. For the turning variant, it is designed to control three axes, including two feed axes via two pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface. For the milling variant, it is designed to control four axes, including three feed axes via three pulse drive interfaces (with SINAMICS V60) and one spindle via one analog spindle interface.

The following diagram shows a system configuration example for the SINUMERIK 808D control system:

Figure 1-1 SINUMERIK 808D control system overview (taking a milling machine for an example)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

7

Delivery check

Note

For a turning machine, you need two sets of setpoint cable + SINAMICS V60 drive + motor cable + brake cable (if necessary) + encoder cable + 1FL5 servomotor.

Legend

Name

Order number

1)

PPU141.1, turning

6FC5370-1AT00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AT00-0CA0 (Chinese)

PPU141.1, milling

6FC5370-1AM00-0AA0 (English)

6FC5370-1AM00-0CA0 (Chinese)

2)

MCP

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 (English)

6FC5303-0AF35-0CA0 (Chinese)

3)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to CPM60.1

6FC5548-0BA00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA00-1BA0 (10 m)

4)

SINAMICS V60 Controlled Power Module

6SL3210-5CC14-0UA0 (4 A)

(CPM60.1)

6SL3210-5CC16-0UA0 (6 A)

6SL3210-5CC17-0UA0 (7 A)

6SL3210-5CC21-0UA0 (10 A)

5)

1FL5 Motor

1FL5060-0AC21-0AA0 (4 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AG0 (4 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AA0 (6 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AG0 (6 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AA0 (7.7 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AG0 (7.7 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AA0 (10 Nm, with key, without brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AG0 (10 Nm, without key, without brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AB0 (4 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5060-0AC21-0AH0 (4 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AB0 (6 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5062-0AC21-0AH0 (6 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AB0 (7.7 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5064-0AC21-0AH0 (7.7 Nm, without key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AB0 (10 Nm, with key, with brake)

1FL5066-0AC21-0AH0 (10 Nm, without key, with brake)

6)

Setpoint cable PPU141.1 to inverter or servo

6FC5548-0BA05-1AF0 (5 m)

spindle drive

6FC5548-0BA05-1AH0 (7 m)

6FC5548-0BA05-1BA0 (10 m)

7)

Motor cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-5LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-5LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

Brake cable (unshielded)

6FX6002-2BR00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2BR00-1BA0 (10 m)

9)

Encoder cable (shielded)

6FX6002-2LE00-1AF0 (5 m)

6FX6002-2LE00-1BA0 (10 m)

10)

Inverter or servo spindle drive

From Siemens or a third-party manufacturer

Commissioning Manual

8

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Delivery check

Check list

Table 1- 1

PPU package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

8

Connectors

• I/O connectors: 7

• 24 V power input connector: 1

Table 1- 2 MCP package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Machine Control Panel (MCP)

1

MCP connection cable (for connecting the MCP to the PPU, max. 50 cm)

1

Mounting clamps with screws

6

Pre-printed MCP strip, Milling

1 set of 6 pieces

Blank strip paper, A4 size

1

Product Information for MCP

1

Table 1- 3 CNC accessories

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Setpoint cable to SINAMICS V60 (for feed axis)

2 (turning) or 3 (milling)

Setpoint cable to Siemens inverter or third-party drive (for spindle)

1

Note

Emergency stop button is not included in our scope of delivery. You can, if necessary, contact your local Siemens salesperson for it.

Table 1- 4

SINAMICS V60 package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

SINAMICS V60

1

Getting Started

1

Cable clamps

2

Warranty Card

1

Table 1- 5

1FL5 motor package

Component

Quantity (pieces)

1FL5 motor

1

Data sheet for 1FL5 motor

1

Table 1- 6 Cables individually packaged

Component

Quantity (pieces)

Motor cable (unshielded)

1

Brake cable (unshielded)

1

Encoder cable (shielded)

1

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

9

Delivery check

Commissioning Manual

10

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

2.1Mounting the controller

Cut-out dimensions

Figure 2-1 Cut-out dimensions (in mm)

Note

Make sure there is enough space around the PPU and the MCP for tightening the screws in the control cabinet.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

11

Mounting

2.1 Mounting the controller

Mounting dimensions

Figure 2-2 Mounting dimensions for PPU (in mm)

Figure 2-3 Mounting dimensions for MCP (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

12

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Mounting clearance (in mm)

To ensure easy maintenance purpose, you must provide sufficient clearance (recommended distance: 80 mm) between the maintenance door and the cabinet wall for replacing the battery and CF card:

Cabinet panel

Maintenance door

2.2Mounting the drive

Cut-outs and mounting dimensions

Figure 2-4 4/6/7 A version (in mm)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

13

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

Figure 2-5 10 A version (in mm)

Mounting method

With 4xM5 preassembled screws, the drive can be mounted vertically onto the inner panel of the cabinet. The maximum screw torque must be 2.0 Nm.

Minimum mounting clearance

To ensure adequate cooling, as a minimum, maintain the specified clearance between drives, one drive and another device/inner panel of the cabinet.

Figure 2-6 Drive mounting clearance (in mm)

Using the cable clamps supplied

If the CE marking requirements for cables are mandatory, the line supply cable and the motor cable used must all be shielded cables. In this case, you can use the cable clamps as a ground connection between the cable shield and a common ground point.

Clamps can also be helpful in better fixing cables (the unshielded motor cable and the line supply cable) in place.

Commissioning Manual

14

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Mounting

2.2 Mounting the drive

The illustration below shows you how to use the clamps to fix both cables and to make a shield connection with the cable.

Figure 2-7 Cable fixing with two cable clamps

CAUTION

Make sure that the clamp for fixing the shielded motor cable has a good contact with the cable shield.

Note

Siemens does not provide the shielded motor cable. Please prepare the shielded motor cable by yourselves for CE certification.

After the installation, it is recommended that the terminal screws should be checked to ensure that they are tight.

Reference

For further information about the drive mounting, refer to SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

15

Mounting

2.3 Mounting the motor

2.3Mounting the motor

Mounting dimensions (mm)

Motor type

A (in mm)

B (in mm)

4 Nm

163 (205)

80

6 Nm

181 (223)

90

7.7 Nm

195 (237)

112

10 Nm

219 (261)

136

Note

Value in brackets is the length of a motor with a built-in brake unit.

Motors with plain shaft have the same dimensions.

Reference

For further information about the motor, refer to 1FL5 Motor Technical Data.

Commissioning Manual

16

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

3.1Interface overview

Interface overview on the Panel Processing Unit (PPU)

NOTICE

The + 24 V and M signals of X200 must be connected; otherwise, the communication between the PPU and the drives does not function as it should.

Figure 3-1 Interface layout

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

17

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X100, X101, X102

Digital inputs

X200, X201

Digital outputs

X21

FAST I/O

X301, X302

Distributed I/O

X10

Hand-wheel inputs

X60

Spindle encoder interface

X54

Analog spindle interface

X2

RS232 interface

X51, X52, X53

Pulse drive interfaces

X30

USB interface, for connection with the MCP

X1

Power supply interface, +24V DC power supply

Battery interface

Slot for the System CompactFlash Card (CF card)

Front

USB interface

Interface overview on the Machine Control Panel (MCP)

Figure 3-2 Interface layout

Legend

Interface

Comment

Rear

X10

USB interface, for connection with the PPU

Commissioning Manual

18

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.2 Connecting the battery

3.2Connecting the battery

A battery has been pre-assembled on the back cover of the PPU.

The battery is not connected when delivered. You must plug the battery connector into the battery interface by yourself before switching the controller on. You can access it after removing the maintenance door:

Maintenance door

Battery interface

Battery

Battery connector

Note

When connecting the battery, ensure that the groove is at the upper side; otherwise, the alarm «NCK battery alarm» will be output after you switch on the controller, and you could lose your data after an unexpected power failure if you do not insert the battery connector correctly.

Note

Battery

Life time: 3 years

Replacement: do not replace the battery when the controller is switched off; otherwise, your data can be lost.

Order number: 6FC5247-0AA18-0AA0.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

19

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

3.3Connecting according to the default PLC program

The SINUMERIK 808D has integrated with a default PLC application. If you perform the commissioning work with the default PLC application, perform wiring as follows.

Connecting the digital inputs and outputs

Figure 3-3 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Milling)

Commissioning Manual

20

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-4 Connecting the digital inputs and outputs (Turning)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

21

siemens 808D Manual

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Connecting the distributed I/O

Figure 3-5 Connecting the distributed I/O

Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (take X51: axis X for an example)

Figure 3-6 Connecting the SINAMICS V60 (X51: axis X)

Commissioning Manual

22

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Note

Filter

A line filter (rated current: 16 A, protection level: IP20) is required so that the system can pass the CE certification (radiated emission test or conducted emission test). The order number of Siemens recommended filter is 6SN1111-0AA01-1BA1.

Note

Circuit breaker

You can install a mains linear breaker (rated current: 15 A for 7 A or 10 A version of the drive and 10 A for 4 A or 6 A version of the drive; rated voltage: 250 VAC) to protect the system.

Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive

Figure 3-7 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (unipolar)

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

23

Connecting

3.3 Connecting according to the default PLC program

Figure 3-8 Connecting the inverter or the servo spindle drive (bipolar)

Note

Cables for connecting X21 must be shielded ones.

Connecting the handwheel

Figure 3-9 Connecting the handwheel

Commissioning Manual

24

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

3.4Connection Overview

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

25

Connecting

3.4 Connection Overview

Note

For the turning variant, connection to X52 is optional and depends upon whether you use the software option «additional axis». If you desire to configure the control system to control a rotary axis or an additional linear axis, connect X52 to a SINAMICS V60 which connects to a servo motor.

Commissioning Manual

26

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4

DANGER

Carrying out of repairs

Anywhere in the automation equipment where faults might cause physical injury or major material damage, in other words, where faults could be dangerous, additional external precautions must be taken, or facilities must be provided, that guarantee or enforce a safe operational state, even when there is a fault (e.g. using an independent limit value switch, mechanical locking mechanisms, EMERGENCY STOP/EMERGENCY OFF devices).

4.1Switching on controller

Before switching on

Make sure that:

You have finished the mechanical installation of the whole system based on the information included in the chapter «Mounting (Page 11)» or the Mechanical Installation Manual.

You have completed the wirings of the whole system according to the information included in the chapter «Connecting (Page 17)» (if you use the default PLC program) or the Electrical Installation Manual.

Switching on

Do as follows:

1.Power on the mains supply.

2.When the NC enters the main screen, check the NC normal status according to the status LEDs on the PPU.

POK: green RDY: green TEMP: unlit

For detailed information about the status LEDs, refer to the section «Status LEDs (Page 30)».

3.Check the drive normal status:

«S-run» is displayed.

LED «RDY/JOG»: green

LED «ERR»: dark

For detailed information about the SINAMICS V60 drives, refer to the SINAMICS V60 Getting Started.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

27

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.2 PPU keyboard function

4.2PPU keyboard function

Legend

Name

Description

Return key

Returns to higher level menu

Horizontal softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Extension key

Reserved. No function

Vertical softkeys

Call corresponding menu functions

Operating area keys

Opens the «MACHINE» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM» operating area

Opens the «OFFSET» operating area

Opens the «PROGRAM MANAGER» operating area

• Opens the «ALARM» operating area

• Combines with the <SHIFT> key to open the

«SYSTEM» area

Opens the «CUSTOM» operating area

Commissioning Manual

28

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.3 MCP mode changeover

4.3MCP mode changeover

Use the machine control panel (MCP) to make changeover between the JOG mode, the Ref Point mode, the AUTO mode and the MDA mode.

The MCP key layout is shown below:

Legend

Name

Description

Mode navigation

Enters the Ref. Point mode for reference point approach

keys

Enters the JOG mode (manual operation)

Enters the AUTO mode (automatic operation)

Enters the MDA mode (manual program input and auto-

matic execution)

Incremental feed

Axis traverses at the increment of 1

keys

Axis traverses at the increment of 10

Axis traverses at the increment of 100

Axis traversing keys

Move an axis (X, Y, Z)

RESET key

Resets NC programs

Cancels alarms

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

29

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.4 Status LEDs

4.4Status LEDs

LEDs on the PPU

The following LEDs are installed on the SINUMERIK 808D PPU.

The individual LEDs and their functions are described in the table below.

Table 4- 1 Status and error displays

LED

Color

Significance

POK

Green

Power supply is OK.

RDY

Green

Ready for operation

TEMP

Yellow

Temperature exceeds the limit

For more information, refer to error description in the SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostics Manual.

LEDs on the SINAMICS V60 drives

Figure 4-1 SINAMICS V60 status LEDs

Commissioning Manual

30

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Table 4- 2 Description of the LED status

Status LED 1

Status LED 2

Description

7-segment LED display description

RDY/JOG

ERR

Green LED

Red LED

Dark

Dark

No 24 V DC Input/Drive Defect

Dark

Dark

Flashing at 1 Hz

Drive not ready

Current status

Green

Dark

Drive ready

Depends on the current menu opera-

tion

Dark

Red

Drvie error

Alarm code

Green

Red

Initialization

Display «8.8.8.8.8.8.»

Flashing at 1 Hz

Dark

JOG mode

Display «J-run»

4.5Password

4.5.1Access levels

Purpose

Access levels/passwords are necessary to prevent system data damages caused by unexpected mistake operations.

Cases

You must set a password for an access level under following cases:

Data restoring

Software update

Password has been deleted

A higher or lower access level is required

Access levels

The SINUMERIK 808D provides a concept of access levels for enabling data areas. You can view such information from the table below:

Table 4- 3 Access level

Access level

Default password

Target group

Manufacturer

SUNRISE

OEMs

Customer

CUSTOMER

End users

No password

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

31

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

With the access level «Manufacturer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying all the machine data

Commissioning work

With the access level «Customer», you can perform the following operations:

Inputting or modifying part of the machine data

Programming

Setting offsets

Measuring tools

For the function areas listed below, the input and modification of data depends on the protection level you have set:

Tool offsets

Work offsets

Setting data

RS232 settings

Program creation / program correction

You can set the protection levels for these function areas via the display machine data (USER_CLASS…): «SYSTEM» operating area > «Mach. data» > «Expert list» > «Display MD».

Note

For detailed information about the display machine data, refer to the Parameter Manual.

Note

For detailed information about how to set the access levels, refer to Programming and Operating Manual.

Access levels: Manufacturer, Customer

Both access levels require a password.

You can change the password only after being activated with the access level «Manufacturer».

If you forget your password, you can carry out an NC start-up: «SYSTEM» operating area > «Start-up» > «NC» > «Power-up with default data». This will reset all passwords to their defaults according to the software release you have acquired.

Note

Before performing a start-up with default data, you must backup your data; otherwise, you will lose your data. For detailed information about how to do data backup, refer to section «Data backup (Page 75)».

Commissioning Manual

32

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.5 Password

Access level: No password

If you have deleted your password or do not set a password, you only have the access right of viewing above-mentioned function areas.

Note

The system has no password by default.

4.5.2Setting a password

The control system is delivered without a password. You must input the password of «SUNRISE» to perform the commissioning work.

Perform the following steps to input the password:

1.In the «SYSTEM» operating area (key combination: + ), press the vertical softkey «Set password». The message text at the bottom of the screen shows «No password set»:

2.Enter «SUNRISE» and press the «Accept» softkey.

3.The message text now shows «Access level: Manufacturer», which indicates that you have successfully set the password.

Note

You can change the default password to you by using the «Change password» softkey.

You can also delete the current password to protect your settings by pressing the «Delete password» softkey.

After the series production, you must press the «Delete password» softkey to exit the «Manufacturer» access level.

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

33

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.6 Setting the date and time

4.6Setting the date and time

At delivery, the system date and time remain at the factory settings, and thus you must manually modify the date and time. Proceed as follows to set the date and time:

1.Press + to enter the «SYSTEM» operating area, then press the softkey «Date time».

2. Input your date and time.

3. Press the «OK» softkey to confirm your settings.

Commissioning Manual

34

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

4.7Introduction to the onboard assistants

The SINUMERIK 808D system software has three onboard assistants:

Startup assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you commission the prototype. With this assistant, you can complete basic machine tool functions.

Series assistant (requires «Manufacturer» access level)

This on-board assistant is designed to help you correctly finish the series machine commissioning.

Operation assistant (requires «Customer» access level)

This onboard assistant is designed to help you learn about the basic operations of the machining process.

Where can I find the assistants?

Press the <MENU FUNCTION> key on the PPU to call the assistants:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

35

Switching on and preparing for commissioning

4.7 Introduction to the onboard assistants

How can I use the assistants?

Status indicators:

Completed task

Current task

Partially completed task group

Uncompleted task

Press one of the three softkeys to access the corresponding assistant

Press to start the assistant

Press to return to the main screen of the onboard assistants

Press any operating area key (CUSTOM excluded) to exit the main screen of the onboard assistants and enter the corresponding operating area

Press to enter the current task or a task that is prior to the current task

Note: This softkey becomes active when you move the cursor key to a valid task.

Commissioning Manual

36

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Commissioning diagram

5

You can commission the SINUMERIK 808D in two ways:

Alternative 1: with the onboard assistants

Alternative 2: without the onboard assistants

When commissioning with the onboard assistants, just follow the assistants step by step.

In this manual, only the second way is described. To do the commissioning work without the onboard assistants, proceed as follows:

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

37

Commissioning diagram

Commissioning Manual

38

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6

6.1Turning

Overview of the PLC subroutines

Subroutine No.

Name

Description

0 to 19

Reserved for the manufacturer

20

AUX_MCP

Auxiliary function

21

AUX_LAMP

Lamp control, called in the subroutine «AUX_MCP».

31

PLC_ini_USR_INI

Reserved for the initialization by the manufacturer (this subroutine is automati-

cally called by subroutine 32)

32

PLC_INI

PLC initialization

33

EMG_STOP

Emergency Stop

37

MCP_NCK

Signals from the MCP and the HMI are sent to NCK interfaces

38

MCP_Tool_Nr

Display tool numbers via the LED of the MCP

39

HANDWHL

Handwheel selection via HMI

40

AXIS_CTL

Control of feed axis enable and spindle enable

41

MINI_HHU

Handwheel hand held unit

42

SPINDLE

Spindle function

43

MEAS_JOG

Tool measurement in the JOG mode

44

COOLING

Coolant control (Manual Machine key and M code: M07, M08, M09)

45

LUBRICATE

Lubrication control (interval and time)

46

PI_SERVICE

ASUP (Asynchronous Subroutine Program)

47

PLC_Select_PP

PLC selects a subroutine.

48

ServPlan

Service plan

49

Gear_Chg1_Auto

Automatic gear change of the spindle

50

Gear_Chg2_Virtual

Dummy gear change of the spindle

51

Turret1_HED_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: Hall element transistor, 4/6

position)

52

Turret2_BIN_T

Turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with codings)

53

Turret3_CODE_T

Hydraulic turret control of the turning machine (turret type: position detection with

codings)

54

Turret2_3_ToolDir

Evaluate tool direction and calculate tool position (called by Turret2_BIN_T,

Turret3_CODE_T)

55

Tail_stock_T

Tail stock control

56

Lock_unlock_T

Clamp or release control

58

MM_MAIN

Manual machine

59

MM_MCP_808D

Spindle signal processing for the manual machine

61, 62

Reserved for the subroutine

63

TOGGLE

Six key-operated switches: K1 to K6

Two delay switches: k7, K8

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

39

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Definition of user-defined keys on the MCP

User-defined key 1

Working lamp

User-defined key 2

Manual cooling

User-defined key 3

Manual tool change

User-defined key 4

Manual chuck clamping and unclamping

User-defined key 5

Chuck clamping internally/externally

User-defined key 6

Tailstock

Structure of the sample application (OB1)

Call Conditions

Subroutine Name

Description

First scan (SM0.1)

PLC_INI (SBR32)

PLC initialization

Each scan (SM0.0)

EMG_STOP (SBR33)

Emergency Stop control

Each scan (SM0.0)

MCP_NCK (SBR37)

Transferring MCP and HMI signals to the NCK interface

Each scan (SM0.0)

HANDWHL (SBR39)

Selecting a hand wheel through the interface signal

DB1900.DBB1xxx

Each scan (SM0.0)

AXIS_CTL (SBR40)

Coordinate enabling control, hardware limit, etc.

Each scan (SM0.0)

COOLING (SBR44)

Cooling control

Each scan (SM0.0)

TURRET1 (SBR46)

HALL effect device turret control

Each scan (SM0.0)

ServPlan (SBR48)

Maintenance plan example: first task

PLC user alarms

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700010

DB1600.DBX1.2

HHU is active

SBR41: MINI_HHU

700011

DB1600.DBX1.3

Not able to lock tool in expected time

700012

DB1600.DBX1.4

Spindle in braking progress

SBR42: SPINDLE

700013

DB1600.DBX1.5

Operation while chuck is not locked

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

700014

DB1600.DBX1.6

Gear-change time out

SBR49: GearChg1_Auto

700015

DB1600.DBX1.7

Gear level position error

700016

DB1600.DBX2.0

Drives not ready

SBR33: EMG_STOP

700017

DB1600.DBX2.1

Operate chuck when spindle or part program is

SBR56: Lock_unlock_T

running

700018

DB1600.DBX2.2

Cooling motor overload

SBR44: COOLING

700019

DB1600.DBX2.3

Coolant liquid position in low level

700020

DB1600.DBX2.4

Lubrication motor overload

SBR45: LUBRICAT

700021

DB1600.DBX2.5

Lubricant liquid position in low level

700022

DB1600.DBX2.6

Turret motor overload

SBR51: Turret1_HED_T

700023

DB1600.DBX2.7

Programmed tool number > max. turret on turret

SBR52: Turret2_BIN_T

number

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700024

DB1600.DBX3.0

Max. tool number setting error

700025

DB1600.DBX3.1

No position signals from turret

700026

DB1600.DBX3.2

Not able to find expected tool in monitor time

Commissioning Manual

40

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

Default PLC applications

6.1 Turning

Alarm No.

Interface Address

Alarm Description

From SBR

700027

DB1600.DBX3.3

Approach reference point again after rotation

SBR40: AXIS_CTL

monitoring

700028

DB1600.DBX3.4

Tool is not locked

SBR53: Turret3_CODE_T

700049

DB1600.DBX6.1

Reference point X-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700050

DB1600.DBX6.2

Reference point Z-axis not reached

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700051

DB1600.DBX6.3

Wrong spindle direction started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700052

DB1600.DBX6.4

Watchdog timer JOG-program

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700053

DB1600.DBX6.5

Spindle override not 100%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700054

DB1600.DBX6.6

Spindle is not started

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700055

DB1600.DBX6.7

Feed override = 0%

SBR58: MM_MAIN

700056

DB1600.DBX7.0

Change of spindle direction not possible in

SBR58: MM_MAIN

thread

700059

DB1600.DBX7.3

Safe door not closed, NC start not possible

SBR22:

AUX_SAFE_DOOR

700060

DB1600.DBX7.4

Channel not in reset, change PRT not possible

SBR37: MCP_NCK

Relevant machine data

MD14510

Unit

Range

Function

Machine data — Integer

14510[12]

*

0 to 1

JOG key layout

14510[20]

2 to 64

The maximum number of tool positions

14510[21]

0.1s

5 to 30

Time for locking a turret

14510[22]

0.1s

30 to 300

The monitoring time for searching a tool

14510[24]

1 min

5 to 300

Lubrication interval

14510[25]

0.01s

100 to 2,000

Lubrication duration

Commissioning Manual

Commissioning Manual, 12/2014, 6FC5397-4EP10-0BA0

41

  • Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D
  • Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D
  • Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • SINUMERIK 808D программирование
  • SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию
  • О SINUMERIK 808D
  • Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DКомпания «Кернел» производит ремонт ЧПУ с 2002 года. За это время мы накопили колоссальный опыт в том числе опыт в ремонте SINUMERIK 808D такого известного производителя как SIEMENS. Ремонт подобной промышленной электроники ответственное и сложное занятие, требующие максимальной отдачи, профессионализма и максимально полной материальной базе.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в производится как в сервисном центре, так и с выездом специалиста на территорию заказчика. SINUMERIK 808D является крайне сложной промышленной электроникой соответственно ремонт SINUMERIK 808D можно доверить только настоящим профессионалам своего дела с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении.

Все специалисты нашего сервисного центра имеют высшее техническое образование, огромный опыт и максимально полную материальную базу включая новейшее высокотехнологичное диагностическое оборудование благодаря чему ремонт SINUMERIK 808D проходит максимально эффективно.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра уделяют максимальное внимание к качеству исполнения ремонта, программирования и настройке ЧПУ, не зависимо от производителя данного промышленного оборудования. Именно поэтому мы смело даем гарантию на ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и замененные в процессе ремонта компоненты шесть месяцев.

Особое внимание заслуживает тот факт, что ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в производится исключительно с использованием оригинальных запасных частей, на компонентном уровне с применением высокотехнологичного оборудования, квалифицированным персоналом с инженерным образованием.

Если на вашем производстве появились проблемы с ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D, которые вы не можете решить самостоятельно, мы всегда рады вам помочь. Обращайтесь в сервисный центр «Кернел». Специалисты нашей компании в минимальные сроки проведут глубокую диагностику ЧПУ и последующий ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в . Оставьте аявку на ремонт ЧПУ используя форму на сайте.

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения об ошибках SINUMERIK 808D и обработка ошибок

При возникновении ошибок при выполнении циклов выдается сигнал и выполнение цикла прерывается. Кроме того, сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Ошибки с их действием и сообщениями в строке сообщений СЧПУ описаны совместно с описанием конкретных циклов.

Обработка ошибок SINUMERIK 808D в циклах

В циклах генерируются сообщения об ошибках с номерами от 61000 до 62999. Диапазон номеров, в свою очередь, снова делится в соответствии с реакциями на ошибки и критериями отмены. Текст ошибки, который отображается вместе с номером ошибки, предоставляет более подробную информацию о причине ошибки.

Номер ошибки

Критерий сброса

Реакция на ошибку

61000 … 61999

NC_RESET

Подготовка кадра в СЧПУ прервана

62000 … 62999

Кнопка сброса

Прерывается подготовка кадра; цикл может быть продолжен нажатием следующей клавиши на MCP после удаления ошибки:

Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Номера ошибок классифицируются следующим образом:

6

_

Х

_

_

  • X=0 Общие ошибки циклов
  • X=1 Ошибки, возникшие при сверлении, фрезеровании
  • X=6 Ошибки, возникшие в циклах токарной обработки

Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Сообщения предоставляют информацию относительно поведения циклов хода обработки и, как правило, хранятся за пределами рабочей операции или до конца цикла. Пример сообщения: «Глубина: в соответствии со значением относительной глубины» для всех циклов сверления.

Все ошибки SINUMERIK 808D описаны в руководстве пользователя, которое вы можете скачать с нашего сайта в удобном формате- pdf.

Скачать руководство пользователя (диагностика) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

Устранение причины ошибки и ее сброс на станке оснащенным системой ЧПУ позволит в кратчайшие сроки возобновить работу. К сожалению не все ошибки можно исправить самостоятельно, некоторые ошибки SINUMERIK 808D возможно исправить только в специализированных сервисных центрах.

SINUMERIK 808D программирование

Программирования SINUMERIK 808DНа ряду с ремонтом, специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» выполняют программирование SINUMERIK 808D и настройку параметров системы ЧПУ. Подобную услугу мы оказываем не только на территории сервисного центра, также инженер компании может выполнить программирование SINUMERIK 808D на территории заказчика.

Настройка параметров, программирование SINUMERIK 808D является заключительным звеном в процессе ремонта ЧПУ и требует профессионального подхода. Именно финальный этап программирования SINUMERIK 808D наглядно покажет качество выполненного ремонта SINUMERIK 808D.

К слову, мы уделяем особое внимание качеству и смело даем гарантию на все выполненные ремонтно-восстановительные работы шесть месяцев, гарантия так же распространяется на запасные части, которые были заменены в процессе ремонта.

Хочется обратить внимание на то, что мы стараемся провести ремонт и программирование SINUMERIK 808D в максимально сжатые сроки, тем самым минимизируем простой дорогостоящего промышленного оборудования.

Дополнительно можно скачать руководство по программированию SINUMERIK 808D в формате- pdf

Скачать руководство пользователя (программирование) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра «Кернел» не только выполняют качественный ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и программирование ЧПУ в . Так же мы предоставляем услугу запуска в эксплуатацию оборудования от стадии проектирования до выпуска первой продукции.

Именно этап запуска в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D отвечает за долгий и безаварийный процесс работы промышленного оборудования, тем самым позволяя получить максимальную прибыль и сэкономить на незапланированном ремонте.

По-настоящему качественный ввод в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D может выполнить только высококвалифицированный специалист с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении. Найти подобного специалиста достаточно сложно, но, если вы обращаетесь в наш сервисный центр вам не придется об этом думать.

В нашей команде работают исключительно профессионалы своего дела, а за время существования нашей компании мы ввели в эксплуатацию не одну сотню систем ЧПУ в том числе и SINUMERIK 808D, с каждым разом получая и накапливая драгоценный опыт.

О SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 808D объединяет в себе качественно сконфигурированную систему ЧПУ предназначенную для работы на фрезерных и токарных станках.

Пример сборки для токарной обработки с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T PPU 160.3 vertical, English layout

1

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP vertical, with handwheel slot, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

RS422 (TTL) incremental encoder, 1024 S/R

1

6FX2001-2EB02

Spring disk coupling, shaft diameter 6 mm/6 mm

1

6FX2001-7KF10

Clamp strap for encoders with Synchro flange

3

6FX2001-7KP01

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 160.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 5 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AF0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 3.0 A

1

6SL3210-5DE13-5UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 5.3 A

1

6SL3210-5DE17-8UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – absolute encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-2DB10-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 1.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-5CL02-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5CL12-1AF0

Pre-assembled brake cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor with holding brake, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1AF0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1AF0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 4 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

1

1FL6061-1AC61-2LG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 11 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6066-1AC61-2LH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle spindle motor, 53 Nm, 1000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LD10-0GA0

Пример сборки для фрезерования с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M PPU 161.3 horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5370-2AM03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0

Electronic handwheel, with front plate 120 mm × 120 mm, with setting wheel, 5 V DC, RS 422

1

6FC9320-5DB01

Terminal strip converter 50-pole

1

6EP5406-5AA00

Cable set, 50-pole ribbon cable, with insulation displacement connectors, 50-pole

1

6EP5306-5BG00

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 161.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 7 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AH0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 4.6 A

2

6SL3210-5DE16-0UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 7.8 A

1

6SL3210-5DE21-0UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

3

6FX3002-2CT12-1BA0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m (32.81 ft)

3

6FX3002-5CL12-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1BA0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 8 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

2

1FL6064-1AC61-2AG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 15 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6067-1AC61-2AH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, 48 Nm, 1500 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LF12-0GA0

SINUMERIK 808D1) Выбор тормозного резистора см. В приводе шпинделя SINAMICS V70.

2) Перечисленные выше 30-метровые силовые кабели (необработанные) можно выбрать для использования с двигателями 1PH1. Вы должны собрать кабель питания с разъемами самостоятельно. Вы также можете выбрать сторонний кабель питания в соответствии с конфигурацией системы.

SINUMERIK 808D выполнен в двух вариантах:

  • Горизонтальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 261.3/PPU 281.3);
  • Вертикальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 260.3/PPU 280.3).

SINUMERIK 808D это моноблочная система ЧПУ, объединяющая в одном устройстве все компоненты СЧПУ:

  • ЧПУ, PLC, HMI;
  • полная клавиатура СЧПУ;
  • регулятор для 6 приводов.

Двигатели могут подключаться напрямую через DRIVE-CLiQ к цифровой приводной системе. В комбинации с модульным исполнением приводной системы SINAMICS S120 получается простая и надежная конструкция с минимальным объемом межкомпонентных соединений.

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 828D

Точно подобранный набор функций системы ЧПУ для стандартных токарных и фрезерных станков отвечает всем требованиям мелко- и крупносерийного производства. Специально подобранные системные параметры для токарной и фрезерной технологии позволяют значительно сократить расходы на ввод станка в эксплуатацию.

Моноблочная система ЧПУ крепится с задней стороны с помощью специальных элементов, входящих в объем поставки.

Линейка промышленной электроники, которую восстанавливают специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» не имеет ограничений, мы выполняем качественный ремонт промышленной электроники и оборудования абсолютно любых производителей не зависимо от года выпуска и наличия технической документации.

Ниже приведен далеко не полный список ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D ремонт которых предлагает наш сервисный центр.

6FC5370-2BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0CA0

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel

6FC5303-0AF35-2AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирования SINUMERIK 808D в можно с помощью специальной формы, которая вызывается нажатием одноименной кнопки в верхней части страницы. Все вопросы, связанные с ремонтом SINUMERIK 808D в вы можете задать нашим менеджерам. Связаться с ними можно несколькими способами:

Наши контакты

  • Заказав обратный звонок (кнопка в правом нижнем углу сайта)
  • Посредством чата (кнопка расположена с левой стороны сайта)
  • Позвонив по номеру телефона: +7(8482) 79-78-54; +7(917) 121-53-01
  • Написав на электронную почту: 89171215301@mail.ru

Вот далеко не полный список производителей промышленной электроники и оборудования, ремонтируемой в нашей компании.

Sinumerik 808D, коническая резьба – ошибка энкодера (026030)

При попытке выполнить коническую резьбу (разные диаметры DM1 и DM2),

Sinumerik выдает ошибку

026030 Axis MX1 encoder 1 absolute position lost

после ошибки ось Х нужно повторно реферировать.

Ошибка появляется при реальной работе и при симуляции.

При выполнении других программ (например, продольная резьба), ошибок нет.

В чем может быть проблема?

Если бы была реальная проблема с энкодером,

то эта ошибка появлялась бы всегда, при выполнении любых программ, но ошибка появляется только при программе – коническая резьба.

В прикреплении видео, когда появляется ошибка и программа.

Токарный станок на базе Sinumerik 808D Adv. (после модернизации, модернизацию делали сами)

PPU 161.2 6FC5370-2AT02-0AA0

Две оси X и Z управляются через привода

Sinamics V70 6SL3210-5DE21-4UA0 и

мотор 1FL6 (1FL6092-1AC61-0LG1, с абсолютным энкодером)

управление по DRIVE BUS)

Шпиндель (старый привод DC), управление по аналоговому заданию 0..10В, есть инкрементный энкодер.

img_20181220_095804.jpg


Изменено 22.12.2018 13:52 пользователем __engineer__

#1

OFFLINE
 

pro-ingener

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 3 сообщений
  • Из:Б

Отправлено 20 Октябрь 2012 — 16:00

Прошу помощи.

Стойка Sinumerik 840D выдает ошибки 700208 и 14014
Суть в следующем.
Есть программа объемом 10 Мб, что существенно больше оперативки (около 1 Мб).
Делаю все как прописанов в инструкции п.4.6.6 «Руководства пользователя. Обработка с жесткого диска», перевожу в автоматический режим и т.д.
Так вот, когда все готово и нажимаешь кнопку «NC-start» на экране появляется сначала ошибка 700208, потом 14014.
До этого в автоматическом режиме на станке никто не работал по причине ненадобности.
Попробовали также запустить программу объемом в 30Кб (давно отработанную в ручном режиме) в автоматическом режиме — выскакивают теже ошибки.
В «Руководстве…» прописано, что с номерами ошибки с 700000 и выше обращайтесь к изготовителю станка, а где его найдешь, прошло уже лет десять.
Возможно у кого-нибудь встречались подобные сбои прошу, помогите.
Стойка Sinumerik 840D, MMC 103.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#2

pro-ingener

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 3 сообщений
  • Из:Б

Отправлено 22 Октябрь 2012 — 09:16

Вот что высвечивается на экране:
Ошибка 700208 — ошибка PI выбора программы,
Ошибка 14014 — канал 1 выбранная программа «sverlenie.MPF» или право доступа отсутствует.
Станок производства немецкой фирмы SW BAS 03-12.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#3

Rtype

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Ковров

Отправлено 22 Октябрь 2012 — 13:56

Вам на форум сапр2000 надо. Здесь не помогут, профиль немного другой.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#4

windnord1

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 2 сообщений
  • Из:ulan-ude

Отправлено 30 Сентябрь 2015 — 11:01

sinumerik 802d выдает ошибку 700027

Помогите!!

  • 0

  • Наверх

#5

3D-BiG

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Ареал обитания — вся страна, но обычно встречаюсь в Новосибирске…
  • Интересы:Полежать на диване, пофлудить на форуме….
  • Из:СССР

Отправлено 30 Сентябрь 2015 — 16:59

sinumerik 802d выдает ошибку 700027 Помогите!!

Вам на форум сапр2000 надо. Здесь не помогут, профиль немного другой.

  • 0

Лужу, паяю, станки ЧПУ починяю….
Еще частенько здесь болтаю: Телеграм сообщество ЧПУшников: t.me/cncunion

  • Наверх

#6

Terex

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 1 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Жлобин

Отправлено 17 Август 2016 — 00:08

Ошибка 14014 — канал 1 выбранная программа «sverlenie.MPF» или право доступа отсутствует.

14014

Канал %1 выбранная программа %3 отсутствует или редактируется

Параметр: %1 = номер канала

%2 = номер кадра, метка

%3 = имя программы

Объяснение:

Выбранная программа обработки детали находится не в памяти NCK или право доступа

для выбора программы соответствует более высокому уровню из актуального состояния

СЧПУ.

При создании этой программы она получила активную степень защиты СЧПУ.

От ПО 5 программа, редактируемая на HMI, более не может быть запущена с NC-Start.

Ошибка устанавливается и тогда, когда для определения GUD или макроопределения

был выбран файл, отличный от предусмотренных для этого файлов определения.

Реакции:

индикация ошибки

Помощь:

Догрузить необходимую программу в память NCK или проверить имя директории и

программы.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#7

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 28 Февраль 2017 — 21:33

Подскажите кто в курсе.Высвечивает ошибка 700047.Нет защиты привода.Куда копать?

  • 0

  • Наверх

#8

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 28 Февраль 2017 — 22:16

70XXXX группа ошбок относится к пользовательской части PLC и строго говоря к PLC Siemens не относится. Данную группу описывает изготовитель станка — соотв спрашивайте завод/продавца. Нормальный производитель по коду ошибки скажет что и где искать (серийный номер станка!).

Еще, конечно, можно лезть в PLC ручками, однако если не знаете что творите, то лучше не надо.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#9

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 28 Февраль 2017 — 23:22

Еще, конечно, можно лезть в PLC ручками, однако если не знаете что творите, то лучше не надо.

Позвонил знакомому Томашу в Польшу.Жду ответа.В PLC лажу периодически когда каретка глючит.

Эта ошибка по защите привода выскакивала,но повторный запуск проги решал вопросы.Сегодня даже перезагрузка станка не помогла.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#10

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 01 Март 2017 — 21:04

Посоветовал постучать по релюшке.Прокатило.Заработал))))

  • 0

  • Наверх

#11

vv92

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Н.Новгород
  • Из:Н.Новгород

Отправлено 02 Март 2017 — 01:23

Я, когда служил, тоже обучал молодых стучать по релюшкам, а до этого меня так учили и видимо многими поколениями до.

Мне и в голову не приходило релюшки заменить. А в воздухе четырнадцать истребителей и не все ассы, ну и генерал у мониторов, хожу-пинаю, чё.

И да, из инструмента у нас по наследству маленькая отвертка передавалась. Но кто служил, знает, что можно было добыть и стрелочный осциллограф.

  • 0

Знаю технику безопасности как свои три пальца.Эксперт — это существо, которое перестало мыслить, ибо оно знает!В мире еще много граблей, на которые не ступала нога человека.
Пожалуйста! Исправляйте мои глупые ошибки (но оставьте мои умные ошибки)!

  • Наверх

#12

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 02 Март 2017 — 11:38

Посоветовал постучать по релюшке.Прокатило.Заработал))))

«Умом Россию не понять, аршином общим не измерить», релюшку не поменять…  , а — постучать!

Поменятьте по возможности, а то получите ударную установку.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#13

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 01:07

Подскажите….Есть постпроцессор под мою CNC машину.Только под какую программу не знаю. Как вообще с этим работать.

На данный момент работаю с лестницами и пишу самостоятельно програмки для трехосевой обработки.

Машина 5 осевая.Для лестниц специальная прога.Сама пишет програмки.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#14

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 02:17

Все ПП что я видел можно открыть как текстовой файл любым редактором ( блокнот и прочие ). Зачастую в заголовке указано для какой САМ прогрвммы данный ПП.
Какая такая специальная прога? Тут с телепатами напряженка, гадать некому.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#15

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 03:33

Vision Stolarstwo 2D 3D V1.0.arp

Постпроцессор где то есть у меня только я уже забыл куда я его сохранил.Даже не знаю как он выглядит.

Вот название …Это не он?

Програма для лестниц wagemeer/ Она проектирует и потом выдает файлы для станка.Там от оператора только поменять расширение и все.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#16

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 14:41

Расширение/тип файла ARP для ПП обычно указывает на AlphaCam. Скорее всего это ПП для AlphaCam’a.

А Вами указанная программа наверно столь экзотическая, что ничего в сети на нее не нашел.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#17

Lodochnik

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Королев

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 20:34

А Вами указанная программа наверно столь экзотическая, что ничего в сети на нее не нашел.

Просто название с ошибками написано, правильно Wagemeyer

  • 0

С уважением, Олег.

  • Наверх

#18

Eledet

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 6 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Алексеевка

Отправлено 03 Март 2017 — 21:56

Скорее всего это ПП для AlphaCam’a

Спасибо.

Теперь вот вопрос.Где найти этот альфакам и как этими двумя програмами пользоваться.

И можно ли этот ПП переделать на компас.

правильно Wagemeyer

Да точно.Сам Антон приезжал и устанавливал в ЧПУшку.

Сейчас он свою прогу забросил и ушел работать в Старкон.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#19

ShadowVoice

  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Город:Рига
  • Интересы:Деньги, власть, женщины. Последовательность можно менять.
  • Из:Рига, Латвия

Отправлено 04 Март 2017 — 00:20

AlphaCam надо не найдти, а купить. Лицензионное соглашение на ПО и закон РФ такой возможности не предусматривют. Вопросы пиратского ПО запрещены на этом форуме. Стоимость Вас обрадует.

Как ими пользоваться — странный вопрос. Изучать как работать в данной программе.

Компас, насколько я знаю, не может создавать программы для ЧПУ станков. Соотв ПП ему НЕ нужен. Изучайте АлфаКам, или Вами упомянутую программу.

  • 0

  • Наверх

#20

Marcus

    Абитуриент

  • Пользователи
  • Pip

  • 3 сообщений
  • Пол:Мужчина
  • Из:Оренбург

Отправлено 26 Декабрь 2017 — 14:34

Доброе время суток! Прошу помощи! 

Возникла проблема с координатно-пробивным станком Durma ТР9 с ЧПУ  Siemens Sinumerik 840D sl.

Станок выдает ошибку 12550. Выставление клампов не происходит. Выскакивает ошибка.

Прикрепленные изображения

  • z32L_6U9DaQ.jpg

Сообщение отредактировал Marcus: 26 Декабрь 2017 — 14:35

  • 0

  • Наверх

Добрый день . Не знаю к кому обратиться . Может вы поможете . Проблема по Senimeric 802s. Запустил программу обработки. На финальной стадии добавил скорости подачи. станок при сверлении остановился и выдал ошибку. 003000, сбросил ее , выдал ошибку 700027 и 700016. сбросил ошибки . Программы без участия шпинделя работают нормально, оси бегают , все ок . при запуске любой программы где есть вращение шпинделя программа выдает при запуске эти ошибки. Без участия шпинделя , все в порядке . Решил попробовать в режиме jog , включаю вращение шпинделя , сразу выскакивают эти-же ошибки. По ошибкам 700027 и 700016 ничего не нашёл . по ошибке 003000 есть информация , но не совсем понятно. Ошибки сбросил , где искать наезд на датчик аварийной остановки не нашёл . Программу сто раз перезагружал , загружал старые сейвы. Автоматы в управлении вроде все включены , нету выбитых , может конечно сгорел предохранитель на блоке питания или на плате , но врятли , тогда бы вообще ничего не работало думаю. В общем если сможете помочь в разрешении этой проблемы , был бы премного благодарен.

  • Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D
  • Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D
  • Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • SINUMERIK 808D программирование
  • SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию
  • О SINUMERIK 808D
  • Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DКомпания «Кернел» производит ремонт ЧПУ с 2002 года. За это время мы накопили колоссальный опыт в том числе опыт в ремонте SINUMERIK 808D такого известного производителя как SIEMENS. Ремонт подобной промышленной электроники ответственное и сложное занятие, требующие максимальной отдачи, профессионализма и максимально полной материальной базе.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в производится как в сервисном центре, так и с выездом специалиста на территорию заказчика. SINUMERIK 808D является крайне сложной промышленной электроникой соответственно ремонт SINUMERIK 808D можно доверить только настоящим профессионалам своего дела с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении.

Все специалисты нашего сервисного центра имеют высшее техническое образование, огромный опыт и максимально полную материальную базу включая новейшее высокотехнологичное диагностическое оборудование благодаря чему ремонт SINUMERIK 808D проходит максимально эффективно.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра уделяют максимальное внимание к качеству исполнения ремонта, программирования и настройке ЧПУ, не зависимо от производителя данного промышленного оборудования. Именно поэтому мы смело даем гарантию на ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и замененные в процессе ремонта компоненты шесть месяцев.

Особое внимание заслуживает тот факт, что ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в производится исключительно с использованием оригинальных запасных частей, на компонентном уровне с применением высокотехнологичного оборудования, квалифицированным персоналом с инженерным образованием.

Если на вашем производстве появились проблемы с ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D, которые вы не можете решить самостоятельно, мы всегда рады вам помочь. Обращайтесь в сервисный центр «Кернел». Специалисты нашей компании в минимальные сроки проведут глубокую диагностику ЧПУ и последующий ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в . Оставьте аявку на ремонт ЧПУ используя форму на сайте.

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения об ошибках SINUMERIK 808D и обработка ошибок

При возникновении ошибок при выполнении циклов выдается сигнал и выполнение цикла прерывается. Кроме того, сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Ошибки с их действием и сообщениями в строке сообщений СЧПУ описаны совместно с описанием конкретных циклов.

Обработка ошибок SINUMERIK 808D в циклах

В циклах генерируются сообщения об ошибках с номерами от 61000 до 62999. Диапазон номеров, в свою очередь, снова делится в соответствии с реакциями на ошибки и критериями отмены. Текст ошибки, который отображается вместе с номером ошибки, предоставляет более подробную информацию о причине ошибки.

Номер ошибки

Критерий сброса

Реакция на ошибку

61000 … 61999

NC_RESET

Подготовка кадра в СЧПУ прервана

62000 … 62999

Кнопка сброса

Прерывается подготовка кадра; цикл может быть продолжен нажатием следующей клавиши на MCP после удаления ошибки:

Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Номера ошибок классифицируются следующим образом:

6

_

Х

_

_

  • X=0 Общие ошибки циклов
  • X=1 Ошибки, возникшие при сверлении, фрезеровании
  • X=6 Ошибки, возникшие в циклах токарной обработки

Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Сообщения предоставляют информацию относительно поведения циклов хода обработки и, как правило, хранятся за пределами рабочей операции или до конца цикла. Пример сообщения: «Глубина: в соответствии со значением относительной глубины» для всех циклов сверления.

Все ошибки SINUMERIK 808D описаны в руководстве пользователя, которое вы можете скачать с нашего сайта в удобном формате- pdf.

Скачать руководство пользователя (диагностика) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

Устранение причины ошибки и ее сброс на станке оснащенным системой ЧПУ позволит в кратчайшие сроки возобновить работу. К сожалению не все ошибки можно исправить самостоятельно, некоторые ошибки SINUMERIK 808D возможно исправить только в специализированных сервисных центрах.

SINUMERIK 808D программирование

Программирования SINUMERIK 808DНа ряду с ремонтом, специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» выполняют программирование SINUMERIK 808D и настройку параметров системы ЧПУ. Подобную услугу мы оказываем не только на территории сервисного центра, также инженер компании может выполнить программирование SINUMERIK 808D на территории заказчика.

Настройка параметров, программирование SINUMERIK 808D является заключительным звеном в процессе ремонта ЧПУ и требует профессионального подхода. Именно финальный этап программирования SINUMERIK 808D наглядно покажет качество выполненного ремонта SINUMERIK 808D.

К слову, мы уделяем особое внимание качеству и смело даем гарантию на все выполненные ремонтно-восстановительные работы шесть месяцев, гарантия так же распространяется на запасные части, которые были заменены в процессе ремонта.

Хочется обратить внимание на то, что мы стараемся провести ремонт и программирование SINUMERIK 808D в максимально сжатые сроки, тем самым минимизируем простой дорогостоящего промышленного оборудования.

Дополнительно можно скачать руководство по программированию SINUMERIK 808D в формате- pdf

Скачать руководство пользователя (программирование) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра «Кернел» не только выполняют качественный ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и программирование ЧПУ в . Так же мы предоставляем услугу запуска в эксплуатацию оборудования от стадии проектирования до выпуска первой продукции.

Именно этап запуска в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D отвечает за долгий и безаварийный процесс работы промышленного оборудования, тем самым позволяя получить максимальную прибыль и сэкономить на незапланированном ремонте.

По-настоящему качественный ввод в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D может выполнить только высококвалифицированный специалист с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении. Найти подобного специалиста достаточно сложно, но, если вы обращаетесь в наш сервисный центр вам не придется об этом думать.

В нашей команде работают исключительно профессионалы своего дела, а за время существования нашей компании мы ввели в эксплуатацию не одну сотню систем ЧПУ в том числе и SINUMERIK 808D, с каждым разом получая и накапливая драгоценный опыт.

О SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 808D объединяет в себе качественно сконфигурированную систему ЧПУ предназначенную для работы на фрезерных и токарных станках.

Пример сборки для токарной обработки с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T PPU 160.3 vertical, English layout

1

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP vertical, with handwheel slot, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

RS422 (TTL) incremental encoder, 1024 S/R

1

6FX2001-2EB02

Spring disk coupling, shaft diameter 6 mm/6 mm

1

6FX2001-7KF10

Clamp strap for encoders with Synchro flange

3

6FX2001-7KP01

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 160.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 5 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AF0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 3.0 A

1

6SL3210-5DE13-5UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 5.3 A

1

6SL3210-5DE17-8UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – absolute encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-2DB10-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 1.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-5CL02-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5CL12-1AF0

Pre-assembled brake cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor with holding brake, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1AF0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1AF0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 4 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

1

1FL6061-1AC61-2LG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 11 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6066-1AC61-2LH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle spindle motor, 53 Nm, 1000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LD10-0GA0

Пример сборки для фрезерования с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M PPU 161.3 horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5370-2AM03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0

Electronic handwheel, with front plate 120 mm × 120 mm, with setting wheel, 5 V DC, RS 422

1

6FC9320-5DB01

Terminal strip converter 50-pole

1

6EP5406-5AA00

Cable set, 50-pole ribbon cable, with insulation displacement connectors, 50-pole

1

6EP5306-5BG00

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 161.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 7 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AH0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 4.6 A

2

6SL3210-5DE16-0UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 7.8 A

1

6SL3210-5DE21-0UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

3

6FX3002-2CT12-1BA0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m (32.81 ft)

3

6FX3002-5CL12-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1BA0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 8 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

2

1FL6064-1AC61-2AG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 15 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6067-1AC61-2AH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, 48 Nm, 1500 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LF12-0GA0

SINUMERIK 808D1) Выбор тормозного резистора см. В приводе шпинделя SINAMICS V70.

2) Перечисленные выше 30-метровые силовые кабели (необработанные) можно выбрать для использования с двигателями 1PH1. Вы должны собрать кабель питания с разъемами самостоятельно. Вы также можете выбрать сторонний кабель питания в соответствии с конфигурацией системы.

SINUMERIK 808D выполнен в двух вариантах:

  • Горизонтальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 261.3/PPU 281.3);
  • Вертикальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 260.3/PPU 280.3).

SINUMERIK 808D это моноблочная система ЧПУ, объединяющая в одном устройстве все компоненты СЧПУ:

  • ЧПУ, PLC, HMI;
  • полная клавиатура СЧПУ;
  • регулятор для 6 приводов.

Двигатели могут подключаться напрямую через DRIVE-CLiQ к цифровой приводной системе. В комбинации с модульным исполнением приводной системы SINAMICS S120 получается простая и надежная конструкция с минимальным объемом межкомпонентных соединений.

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 828D

Точно подобранный набор функций системы ЧПУ для стандартных токарных и фрезерных станков отвечает всем требованиям мелко- и крупносерийного производства. Специально подобранные системные параметры для токарной и фрезерной технологии позволяют значительно сократить расходы на ввод станка в эксплуатацию.

Моноблочная система ЧПУ крепится с задней стороны с помощью специальных элементов, входящих в объем поставки.

Линейка промышленной электроники, которую восстанавливают специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» не имеет ограничений, мы выполняем качественный ремонт промышленной электроники и оборудования абсолютно любых производителей не зависимо от года выпуска и наличия технической документации.

Ниже приведен далеко не полный список ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D ремонт которых предлагает наш сервисный центр.

6FC5370-2BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0CA0

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel

6FC5303-0AF35-2AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирования SINUMERIK 808D в можно с помощью специальной формы, которая вызывается нажатием одноименной кнопки в верхней части страницы. Все вопросы, связанные с ремонтом SINUMERIK 808D в вы можете задать нашим менеджерам. Связаться с ними можно несколькими способами:

Наши контакты

  • Заказав обратный звонок (кнопка в правом нижнем углу сайта)
  • Посредством чата (кнопка расположена с левой стороны сайта)
  • Позвонив по номеру телефона:
    • +7(8482) 79-78-54;
    • +7(8482) 55-96-39;
    • +7(917) 121-53-01
  • Написав на электронную почту: 89171215301@mail.ru

Вот далеко не полный список производителей промышленной электроники и оборудования, ремонтируемой в нашей компании.

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostic Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Siemens Manuals
  4. Control Unit
  5. SINUMERIK 808D
  6. Diagnostic manual
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

T able of contents

Tables

Figures

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

Diagnostics Manual

Diagnostics Manual

08/2013

6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1

Preface

Introduction

Operating in the «SYSTEM»

area

SINUMERIK 808D

ADVANCED alarms

System responses

SINAMICS V70 alarms

Data backup

Updating software

Appendix A

Related Manuals for Siemens SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

Summary of Contents for Siemens SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

  • Page 1
    T able of contents Tables Figures 1  Introduction Operating in the «SYSTEM» 2  SINUMERIK area SINUMERIK 808D 3  SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED ADVANCED alarms Diagnostics Manual 4  System responses 5  SINAMICS V70 alarms Diagnostics Manual 6  Data backup 7  Updating software A …
  • Page 2
    Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Configuring the Ethernet connection ………………46 2.12 Defining the maintenance planner………………… 52 2.13 Alarm display ……………………..53 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms ………………..55 System error alarms ……………………55 NCK alarms ……………………..55 Drive alarms ……………………..333 PLC alarms……………………..342 Cycle alarms……………………..346…

  • Page 4
    Table of contents PLC user alarms ……………………434 System responses ………………………435 System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms …………….435 Cancel criteria for alarms………………….438 SINAMICS V70 alarms ……………………..439 Overview of alarms ……………………439 Common faults and alarms…………………. 441 Data backup ……………………….453 Overview of internal/external data backup…………….
  • Page 5: Preface

    Preface Applicable products This manual is applicable to the following control systems: Control system Software version SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T (Turning) V4.6 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M (Milling) V4.6 Documentation components and target groups Component Recommended target group User documentation Programming and Operating Manual (Turning)

  • Page 6
    EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at http:/ /support.automation.siemens.com Here, enter the number 15257461 as the search term or contact your local Siemens office. Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 7: Introduction

    Introduction Structure of the Diagnostics Manual NCK / PLC alarms The descriptions for the alarms can be found in the chapters: • NCK alarms (Page 55) • Drive alarms (Page 333) • PLC alarms (Page 342) • Cycle alarms (Page 346) •…

  • Page 8: Alarm Number Ranges

    Introduction 1.2 Alarm number ranges Action list The actions described in the NCK alarm texts («Action %…») are explained in the following Chapter: See Chapter: Cancel criteria for alarms (Page 438) Specification «%» The specification «%» represents variables for an online parameter that is replaced on the control with a corresponding value.

  • Page 9: Operating In The «System» Area

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area Operating area overview Softkey functions Press the keys on the PPU to enter the following operating area. This operating area includes functions required for parameterizing and analyzing the NCK, the PLC and the drive. The start screen displays the machine configuration data and softkeys available.

  • Page 10: Setting Start-Up Function

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.2 Setting start-up function An extended horizontal softkey bar can be accessed via this key on the PPU. Two extended horizontal softkeys are provided: Views the service information Defines the maintenance planner Setting start-up function Functionality This softkey allows you to choose the NC, PLC, and drive start-up modes.

  • Page 11
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.2 Setting start-up function Selecting a PLC restart mode Proceed through the following steps to select a PLC restart mode: Select the desired operating area. Press this softkey. Press this softkey to open the window for selecting the PLC start-up mode.
  • Page 12: Setting System Machine Data

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Select all drives or one specific drive using the cursor keys. Press this softkey to confirm your selection. The selected drive(s) will restart in the mode selected. Setting system machine data Machine data structure Any changes in the machine data have a substantial influence on the machine.

  • Page 13
    2.3 Setting system machine data Setting basic machine data The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED provides two easy-to-use data lists for beginner users. You can use the basic data list for quick access of common NC data and drive data. Setting basic NC data In the basic NC data list, the general, axis, and channel MD are integrated in one screen.
  • Page 14
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting basic drive data Several common drive parameters are provided in the basic drive data list. Proceed through the following steps to set the basic drive data: Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of basic drive data through the following softkey operations: →…
  • Page 15
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting machine data in expert list All machine data are divided into five groups described as follows. Setting general machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of general machine data through the following softkey operations: →…
  • Page 16
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting channel-specific machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of channel-specific machine data through the following softkey operations: → → Locate the machine data which you desire to set. You can also search for an MD using the following softkeys: Searches for the desired number or the name (or a part of the name) of the machine data…
  • Page 17
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting axis-specific machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of axis-specific machine data through the following softkey operations: → → Locate the machine data which you desire to set. You can also search for an MD using the following softkeys: Searches for the desired number or the name (or a part of the name) of the machine data…
  • Page 18
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting drive machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of drive machine data through the following softkey operations: → → Locate the machine data which you desire to set. You can also search for an MD using the following softkeys: Searches for the desired number or the name (or a part of the name) of the machine data…
  • Page 19
    To learn more functions regarding the servo trace, refer to the Section «Servo trace (Page 40)». References You can find a description of the machine data in the following manufacturers’ documents: SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Parameter Manual SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 20: Configuring The Drive System

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.4 Configuring the drive system Configuring the drive system Pressing this softkey opens the drive system configuration window where you can configure the connected drives and motors. Before starting the drive and motor configuration, you must ensure the Drive Bus addresses are properly set (p0918) via the drive BOPs according to the instructions in the window above.

  • Page 21
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.4 Configuring the drive system Press this softkey to enter the motor configuration window. Select the right motor ID according to the motor rating plate with the cursor keys. Press this softkey to confirm your selection. The selected motor information then displays in the drive list.
  • Page 22: Plc Diagnostics

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics PLC diagnostics Functionality A PLC user program consists to a large degree of logical operations to realize safety functions and to support process sequences. These logical operations include the linking of various contacts and relays. As a rule, the failure of a single contact or relay results in a failure of the whole system/installation.

  • Page 23: Screen Layout

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics ⑥ ⑬ Displays the list of cross references Displays all symbolic identifiers used in the selected network ⑦ Displays the logic and graphic information of the selected program block 2.5.1 Screen layout Legend Display Meaning…

  • Page 24: Operating Options

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics 2.5.2 Operating options In addition to the softkeys and the navigation keys, this area provides still further key combinations. Hot keys The cursor keys move the focus over the PLC user program. When reaching the window borders, it is scrolled automatically.

  • Page 25
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics Key combination Action To the last field of the subroutine Opens the previous program block in the same window Opens the next program block in the same window The function of the Select key depends on the position of the input focus.
  • Page 26
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics Searching for operands In big programs, you can use the search function to quickly reach the desired positions. To search for operands, follow these steps: Use this softkey to switch between the absolute and symbolic representation of the operands.
  • Page 27: Displaying Information On The Program Blocks

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics 2.5.3 Displaying information on the program blocks Functionality You can display any logical and graphical information of a program block in the program windows. The program block is one of the components of the PLC user program. Logic information The logics in the ladder diagram (LAD) display the following: •…

  • Page 28: Displaying Cross-References

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics Select the desired program block and press this softkey to open it. After the selected program block is opened, you can press the following softkeys to switch the display information. Further softkeys are available in the program block window as follows: Displays additional information of the selected program block Displays the table of local variables of the selected…

  • Page 29: Setting The Hmi Display

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.6 Setting the HMI display Setting the HMI display 2.6.1 Setting the date and time At delivery, the system date and time remain at the factory settings, and thus you must manually modify the date and time in the window as follows. Operating sequence Select the desired operating area on the PPU.

  • Page 30: Adjusting The Screen Brightness

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.6 Setting the HMI display 2.6.2 Adjusting the screen brightness You can open the window for adjusting the brightness of the HMI screen through the following operations: → → Press this softkey to increase the brightness of the HMI screen. Press this softkey to decrease the brightness of the HMI screen.

  • Page 31: Managing The System Data

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.7 Managing the system data Managing the system data Overview By pressing this softkey in the system data management operating area, you can enter the window as follows: Three folders and one file are available in this window. You can import/export the subfolders or single files in this window for backup or other customized purposes.

  • Page 32
    You can import/export the subfolders or single files in this window for backup or other customized purposes. For more information, refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual and SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual. Managing the NCK/PLC data Select this folder and press the key to enter.
  • Page 33: Creating Commissioning Archives

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.8 Creating commissioning archives Creating commissioning archives Functionality Pressing this softkey allows you to create or restore a start-up or series start-up archive in the following window. Operating sequence Select the desired operating area on the PPU. Press this horizontal softkey to open the start-up archive window.

  • Page 34: Optimizing Drive Performance

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.9 Optimizing drive performance Press this softkey to confirm and the archive information dialog opens. Specify the properties of the archive and press this softkey to start creating the archive file in the selected folder. Optimizing drive performance The control system provides facilities to optimize the performance of each connected drive by automatically modifying the control loop parameters.

  • Page 35
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.9 Optimizing drive performance Press this softkey to return to the main screen of drive optimization. Press this softkey to enter the preparation screen before the optimization. Switch to «JOG» mode, and use the axis traversing keys to move the axis to a safe position.
  • Page 36: Viewing The Service Info

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Views the optimization results of the previous axis Returns to the main screen of drive optimization. In this case, you may optimize the drive again with either new measurements or last measurement results. 2.10 Viewing the service info You can view the service information through the following operations:…

  • Page 37: Action Log

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info 2.10.1 Action log Overview The action log function is provided for service events. The contents of the action log file can only be accessed through a system password on the HMI. Viewing the action log Select the desired operating area.

  • Page 38
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Settings for the message sending Proceed through the following steps to configure the settings for the message sending: Select the desired operating area. Press this key to view the extended softkeys. Open the service message window through the following softkey operations: →…
  • Page 39: Data Backup

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Press this softkey to save the settings and return to the service message main screen. Press this softkey to cancel and return to the service message main screen. Note To transfer messages via the RS232 interface, the communication settings from the following are used: →…

  • Page 40: Servo Trace

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info 2.10.3 Servo trace Overview An oscilloscope function is provided for the purpose of optimizing the drives. This enables the following graphical representations: • velocity setpoint • contour violation • following error •…

  • Page 41
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info To analyze the result, you can perform the following operations: • Changing and scaling the abscissa and ordinate values • Measuring a value using the horizontal or vertical marker • Measuring the abscissa and ordinate values as a difference between two markers •…
  • Page 42: Version/Hmi Details

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Press this softkey to return after you set the desired marker steps. If the trace exceeds the current screen, press + cursor movement. When a marker reaches the margin of the diagram, the grid automatically appears in the horizontal or vertical direction.

  • Page 43
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info This window displays the version numbers and the date of creation of the individual CNC components. ① ③ Displays the operator programs with the Activates the licensed optional functions version numbers ②…
  • Page 44
    Press this softkey to open the dialog for entering the license key Enter the license key in the following dialog: Press this softkey to confirm. Activating the options The following optional functions can be purchased for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system. • Additional axes •…
  • Page 45
    For the other options, press the following key to select: Press this softkey to restart the NCK, so that the licensed options are activated. Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 46: Configuring The Ethernet Connection

    With the tool Access MyMachine P2P (AMM) installed on your PC/PG, you can enable the Ethernet connection between a SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system and a PC/PG. This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox and is supported by Windows XP/Vista/Win 7.

  • Page 47
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Select the direct connection option in the following dialog and then click this button. An attempt is made to establish a direct connection. If you have not established any authentication data, the following dialog appears: Select the log-on details and enter the corresponding password or alternatively select a key file in the dialog.
  • Page 48
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Enter the main screen of the service control options through the following softkey operations: → Press this softkey to enter the window for the network configuration. Note: make sure the following vertical softkey is not selected: Configure the network as required in the following window: You can configure the DHCP with the following key: Note: if you select «No»…
  • Page 49
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Select the new network connection option in the following dialog: This dialog can also be called with the button from the toolbar. The dialog for setting the new network connection appears. Assign the parameters for a new network connection in this dialog: Select the following button to save the settings: Select the following button and the AMM tool connects to the control…
  • Page 50
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Creating and connecting a network drive Proceed as follows to create and connect a network drive: Share a directory on your local disk on your PC/PG. Select the desired operating area on the PPU. Press this key to view the extended softkeys.
  • Page 51
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Press this softkey to establish the server connection and assign the local shared directory to the network drive. You can disconnect a selected network drive using the following softkey: After you connect a network drive successfully, you may open it directly on the PPU using the following softkey either in the system data management operating area or in the program management operating area:…
  • Page 52: Defining The Maintenance Planner

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.12 Defining the maintenance planner 2.12 Defining the maintenance planner Overview This part introduces how to define the maintenance planner. You can enter the maintenance planner main screen through the following operations: → → The maintenance planner window displays the position, task description, interval, first warning time, number of warnings, etc.

  • Page 53: Alarm Display

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.13 Alarm display 2.13 Alarm display Softkey functions Press this key on the PPU to open the alarm window. You can check the NC and drive alarms using the softkeys. PLC alarms are not sorted. ①…

  • Page 54
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.13 Alarm display Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 55: Sinumerik 808D Advanced Alarms

    This alarm is also caused by PLC stop. (PLC stop with programming tool, PLC stop by commissioning switch, PLC stop by alarm) If none of these cases applies, place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/ support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON.

  • Page 56
    $MN_PLC_RUNNINGUP_TIMEOUT must be checked and adapted to the first OB1 cycle. — Determine the cause of error in the PLC (loop or stop in the user program) and eliminate it. Place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON.
  • Page 57
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 2900 Reboot is delayed Definitions: This alarm indicates a delayed reboot. This alarm only occurs when reboot was carried out by the HMI and MD10088 $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME was set greater than zero. The alarm can be suppressed with MD11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK Bit 20.
  • Page 58
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Only axes that have been activated in the channel by MD20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [kx]=m may be declared as geometry axes, transformation axes or orientation axes in MD20050 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB [gx]=k. This also applies to MD22420 $MC_FGROUP_DEFAULT_AXES (gx: Geometry axis index, kx: Channel axis index, k: Channel axis no., m: Machine axis no.).
  • Page 59
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Example: — CHANDATA(2) — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0] = 7 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[1] = 8 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[2] = 0 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[3] = 3 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4] = 2 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[5] = 0 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[6] = 1 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[7] = 0 This channel uses the five machine axes 1, 2, 3, 8, 7, i.e.
  • Page 60
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: When determining a name in the NCK tables (arrays) for: machine axes, Euler angles, direction vectors, normal vectors, interpolation parameters and intermediate point coordinates, one of the following syntax rules for the identifier…
  • Page 61
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 4020 Identifier %1 used several times in machine data %2 Parameters: %1 = String: Name of identifier %2 = String: MD identifier Definitions: When determining a name in the NCK tables (arrays) for: machine axes, Euler angles, direction vectors, normal vectors, interpolation parameters and intermediate point coordinates, an identifier has been used that already exists in the control.
  • Page 62
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4032 [Channel %1: ] Wrong identifier for facing axis in %2 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = String: MD identifier Definitions: According to the axis configuration in MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES or MD20100 $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF, a facing axis identifier is expected at the specified location.
  • Page 63
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Renaming of an NC code was not possible for one of the following reasons: — The old identifier does not exist — The new identifier lies in another type range. NC codes/keywords can be reconfigured via machine data as long as the type range is not abandoned.
  • Page 64
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Restart the control. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 4070 Normalizing machine data has been changed Definitions: The control uses internal physical units (mm, degrees, s, for paths, velocities, acceleration, etc.). During programming or data storage, some of these values are input and output using different units (rev./min, m/s2, etc.).
  • Page 65
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: On executing a TOA file or when writing data from the part program an attempt has been made to write data with a higher protection level than the access authorization currently set in the control. The data in question have not been written and program execution is continued without hindrance.
  • Page 66
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 2. MD10910 $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 or MD10930 $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2: the contents of the displayed tables are incorrect. — The entered positions must be arranged in increasing size. — A particular position must not be set more than once.
  • Page 67
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4112 Servo cycle changed to %1 ms Parameters: %1 = String (new servo cycle time) Definitions: For PROFIBUS/PROFINET only: MD10060 $POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO has been modified because of the modified DP cycle in the SDB (MD10050 $SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME).
  • Page 68
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms MD10718 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR contains an invalid array index of MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n]. Currently, the values 0 to 9 are permissible. The affected machine data is reset to the default value -1. This deactivates the function.
  • Page 69
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4180 Invalid M function number assigned to enable ASUP Definitions: An invalid M function number has been assigned for activation of ASUP. An illegal M number has been assigned in MD10804 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT or MD10806 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT for the configuration of the M number range for activation/deactivation of the interrupt program.
  • Page 70
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Check the specified machine data and create a unique assignment of M auxiliary function numbers. Program Switch control OFF — ON.
  • Page 71
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Remove rotary axis declaration for this machine axis. For this purpose, the geometry axis index for the displayed geometry axis must be determined by means of MD20060 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB.
  • Page 72
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4225 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 declaration as rotary axis missing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, axis number Definitions: The modulo functionality requires a rotary axis (positions in [deg]).
  • Page 73
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Correct machine data. Activate required inputs/outputs via MDs: MD10350 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS MD10360 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS MD10300 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS MD10310 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS Activation of fast inputs/outputs does not require the corresponding hardware configuration to be available at the control.
  • Page 74
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4282 Hardware of external NCK outputs assigned repeatedly Definitions: Several outputs have been configured on the same hardware byte. Reaction: NC not ready. Channel not ready. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set.
  • Page 75
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4340 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 invalid transformation type in transformation no. %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Transformation number Definitions: An invalid, i.e. undefined number was entered in one of the machine data $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_..This alarm also occurs if a certain type of transformation is only impossible on the type of control used (e.g.
  • Page 76
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Set valid machine data. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 77
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: MD2..$MC_TRAFO_AXIS_IN_… contains an invalid entry. The following causes for the error are possible: — The entry refers to a channel axis which does not exist. — The entry is zero (no axis) but the transformation needs the relevant axis as a channel axis.
  • Page 78
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 77. The 3rd linear axis is not perpendicular to the rotary axis and the first geometry axis. 78. More than one additional linear axis was defined. 79. Illegal kinematic chain element type (e.g. manual rotary axis).
  • Page 79
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A machine data has been altered that configures the buffered memory. If the NCK powers up with the altered data, this will lead to reorganization of the buffered memory and thus to the loss of all buffered user data (part programs, tool data, GUD, leadscrew error compensation, …)
  • Page 80
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: H numbers must be assigned only once in a TO unit. Then, MD10890, $MN_EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE, bit 3 can be set = 0 and a restart can be performed. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 81
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The handwheel input for handwheel %1 requested through MD11352 $MN_HANDWHEEL_INPUT is not available for 802D sl, 828D sl, 808D systems. A maximum of 2 handwheels can be directly linked to 802D sl, 828D sl, 808D systems.
  • Page 82
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Set machine date MD11351 $MN_HANDWHEEL_MODULE = 1 for the corresponding handwheel. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 4641 Invalid handwheel input for handwheel %1…
  • Page 83
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Data management has detected an error during ramp-up. The specified data block may not have been created. The error number specifies the type of error. An error number >100000 indicates a fatal system error. Other error numbers indicate that the user memory area provided is too small.
  • Page 84
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: NC not ready. Channel not ready. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Correct the machine data or undo the changes made.
  • Page 85
    There is no interference with any NCK functions. It shows that the NCK has less free user memory available than specified by Siemens for this control variant. The value of the actually available free user memory can also be taken from the MD18050 $MN_INFO_FREE_MEM_DYNAMIC, MD18060 $MN_INFO_FREE_MEMS_STATIC.
  • Page 86
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 6437 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Command ‘%3’ cannot be programmed. Function ‘%4’ is activated. Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Programmed command %4 = Function identifier Definitions: The command cannot be programmed as the specified function is active.
  • Page 87
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 6520 The value of the machine data %1%2 is too low Parameters: %1 = String: MD identifier %2 = If required, index: MD array Definitions: The MD18370 $MN_MM_PROTOC_NUM_FILES specifies the number of protocol files for the protocol users.
  • Page 88
    Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 6583 NC system memory full Definitions: The DRAM file system of the system area (Siemens) is full. The order cannot be executed. Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Delete or unload files (e.g. parts programs) Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 89
    Alarm display. Remedy: Modify definition files /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_MACCESS_DEF or /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_UACCESS_DEF-CESS_ DEF. Please see the Siemens Programming Guide or the OEM documentation for the language commands permissible for the relevant system configurations. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 90
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Do not use rapid interrupt inputs or contact the machine manufacturer with a view to retrofitting this option! Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 91
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Purchase option — Reset the activation of ‘Advanced Surface’ functionality (MD20606 $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_ON and/or MD20443 $MC_LOOKAH_FFORM) Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 8030 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 option ‘interpolation of more than %3 axes’ not set…
  • Page 92
    3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. For retrofitting the option, please refer to your machine manufacturer or to a sales representative of SIEMENS AG, A&D MC. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 93
    One ore more options were activated, that are not licensed by the license key entered. Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Generate a new license key on the internet at http://www.siemens.com/automation/licence and enter it in the operating area «Setup», function (HSK) «Licenses».. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 94
    Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Generate a new license key via the Internet at http://www.siemens.com/automation/license and enter in the operating area «Startup», function (HSK) «Licenses». Enter a valid license key in the operating area «Startup», function (HSK) «Licenses». Activate an additional test period…
  • Page 95
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 96
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 10204 [Channel %1: ] User action not possible without reference point (internal action=%2<ALNX>) Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = internal action number/internal action name…
  • Page 97
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: NC-Start Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 10225 [Channel %1: ] command denied Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: The channel has received a command that cannot be executed.
  • Page 98
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: This alarm occurs only when several blocks with G33 follow in succession. The block end velocity in the specified block is zero, although a further thread cutting block follows. The reasons for this can be, for instance:…
  • Page 99
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Check and correct the part program (analyze whether motion beyond block boundaries is appropriate here). Prevent block change by means of the keyword WAITP for axes or WAITS for spindles until the positioning axes or positioning spindles have also reached their target position.
  • Page 100
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10630 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 at working area limit %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis, spindle number %4 = String (+ or -) Definitions: The specified axis violates the working area limitation.
  • Page 101
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary. Continuation: 10634 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2, tool radius compensation is inactive for type %3 working area limitation, reason: The tool is not oriented parallel to the axis.
  • Page 102
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: The tool radius compensation for working area limitations in JOG mode cannot be taken into account wihout an active tool. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 10650…
  • Page 103
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 13: Slave axis grouping 3 Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 10652 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 gantry warning threshold exceeded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis Definitions: The gantry following axis has exceeded the warning limit specified in MD37110 $MA_GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING.
  • Page 104
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary. Continuation: 10656 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 gantry slave axis dynamically overloaded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis Definitions: The indicated gantry slave axis is dynamically overloaded, i.e.
  • Page 105
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Error ID: — 30XX => assign all gantry axes to the current channel, for example via axis exchange. — 40XX => set all axes of the gantry group to the same axis state, for example assign all axes to the NC program, or assign all axes to the PLC.
  • Page 106
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10703 [Channel %1: ] Channel-specific protection zone %2 violated during manual mode Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Protection zone number Definitions: The workpiece-related channel-specific protection zone has been violated. Note that another tool-related protection zone is still active.
  • Page 107
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10720 [Channel %1: ] Block %3 axis %2 software limit switch %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number %3 = Block number, label %4 = String (+ or -) Definitions: The path programmed for the axis violates the currently valid software limit switch.
  • Page 108
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The path programmed for the axis violates the currently valid software limit switch. The alarm is activated when preparing the part program block. This alarm is issued instead of alarm 10720 if bit 11=1 in the MD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK. Alarm 10722 offers an expanded diagnostics option for the software limit switch violation.
  • Page 109
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: This alarm is generated if it is determined during block preparation that the programmed path of the axis violates the working area limitation. If bit 11=0 in machine data MD11411$MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK, this alarm is issued instead of alarm 10732. If bit 11 is set in machine dataMD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK, an expanded diagnostics option is offered for the software limit switch violation.
  • Page 110
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10733 [Channel %1: ] Block %5 axis %2 working area limitation violated, residual distance: %6 %3<ALUN> Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number %3 = Unit of distance %4 = Block number, label|residual distance Definitions: The motion planned for the axis violates the currently active working area limitation.
  • Page 111
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Determine the cause of the offset from the initial or target position. The REPOS command is executed at the end of an ASUB or system ASUB. See also cross reference from ASUBs.
  • Page 112
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: An attempt has been made to activate a WAB motion before a previously activated WAB motion was terminated. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 113
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10747 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 retraction direction not defined for WAB Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In a WAB retraction block with quarter circle or semi-circle (G248 or G348), the end point in the machining plane was not programmed, and either G143 or G140 without tool radius compensation is active.
  • Page 114
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The «Bottleneck detection» (calculation of intersection for the following compensated traversing blocks) has not been able to calculate a point of intersection for the reviewed number of traversing blocks. It is therefore possible that one of the equidistant paths violates the workpiece contour.
  • Page 115
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10754 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 deselection of the tool radius compensation only possible in linear block Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Deselection of tool radius compensation with G40 can only be performed in blocks where the G function G00 (rapid traverse) or G01 (feed) is active.
  • Page 116
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Place deselection of the CRC such that the programmed end point comes to rest outside the compensation circle around the last active compensation point. The following possibilities are available:…
  • Page 117
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Do not use splines or polynomials when writing the contour section, but straight lines and circles instead. Divide up the tool piece geometry and deselect the cutter radius compensation between the various sections.
  • Page 118
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — Modify part program — Modify machine data — Check whether SBL2 is activated. With SBL2, a block is generated from each part program line which can lead to exceeding the maximum permissible number of empty blocks between two traversing blocks.
  • Page 119
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10770 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 change of corner type due to change of orientation with active tool radius compensation Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The type of a corner (inside or outside corner) depends not only on the programmed path but also on the tool orientation.
  • Page 120
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10778 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 preprocessing stop with active tool radius compensation Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: If a preprocessing stop is detected with active tool radius compensation (either programmed by the user or generated…
  • Page 121
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 10784 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegal tool for tool radius compensation with constraint…
  • Page 122
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10792 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegal interpolation type during linear programming with angles Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Only spline or linear interpolation is permitted for programming two straight lines with angle specification. Circular or polynomial interpolation is not allowed.
  • Page 123
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: During programming of a straight line, both positions of the active plane and an angle were specified (the position of the end point is over-specified), or the position of the programmed coordinate cannot be reached with the specified angle.
  • Page 124
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms For the definition the MD 20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND is available for the default or the keyword SETMS in the part program, thus allowing each spindle of the channel to be redefined as master spindle.
  • Page 125
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10861 [Channel %1: ] Block %3 velocity of positioning axis %2 is zero Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis %3 = Block number, label Definitions: No axis velocity has been programmed and the positioning velocity set in the machine data is zero.
  • Page 126
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Check the NC program for correct tool selection and correct it, if required; then continue the NC program with NC start.
  • Page 127
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Modify part program such that the number of dummy blocks is reduced. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 128
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10891 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 multiplicity of node is greater than its order Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In the B spline the distance between nodes PL (node = point on spline at which 2 polynomials meet) has been programmed with zero too often in succession (i.e.
  • Page 129
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Local alarm reaction. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 10912 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 preprocessing and main run might not be synchronized…
  • Page 130
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10915 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Preparation problem in LookAhead (Identifier %3, Details %4) Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Error code %4 = Error details Definitions: The NCK was incorrectly parameterized (under certain circumstances, the parameterized memory is not sufficient), which is why LookAhead can no longer be operated in the expansion mode.
  • Page 131
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: The errors listed above must be corrected in the subroutine for the stock removal contour. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 132
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The calculation of the arc length function could not be performed to the required accuracy. Reaction: Alarm display. Warning display. Remedy: The calculation of the arc length function could not be performed to the required accuracy during active polynomial interpolation.
  • Page 133
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12000 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 address %3 programmed repeatedly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string of the address Definitions: Most addresses (address types) may only be programmed once in an NC block, so that the block information remains unambiguous (e.g.
  • Page 134
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In polynomial interpolation, polynomials must not be greater than the 3rd degree (refer to Programming Guide). f(p) = a0 + a1 p + a2 p2 + a3 p3 The coefficients a0 (the starting points) are identical to the end points of the preceding block and need not be programmed.
  • Page 135
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The G functions that can be used in the part program are divided into groups that are syntax defining or non-syntax defining. Only one G function may be programmed from each G group. The functions within a group are mutually preclusive.
  • Page 136
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12090 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 unexpected parameter %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Disallowed parameters in the text Definitions: The programmed function has been predefined; no parameters are allowed in its call. The first unexpected parameter is displayed.
  • Page 137
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms G92: Spindle speed limitation with v constant STARTFIFO, STOPFIFO: Control of preprocessing buffer E.g. G4 F1000 M100: no M function allowed in the G4 block. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set.
  • Page 138
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 139
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 22 Frequency [Hz] 23 Voltage [V] 24 Current [A] 25 Temperature [degrees Celsius] 26 Angle [degrees] 27 KV [ 1000/min ] 28 Linear or angluar position [mm|deg or inch|deg] 29 Cutting velocity [m/min; feet/min] 30 Peripheral velocity [m/s;…
  • Page 140
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: If access protection in the part program and on the OPI needs to be set to diffferent levels, only the language commands APWP, APWB, APRP and APRB may be used.
  • Page 141
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12190 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 variable of type ARRAY has too many dimensions Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Array with variables of type STRING may be no more than 1-dimensional, and with all other variables no more than 2-dimensional.
  • Page 142
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: — In the definition of a STRING type variable, an attempt has been made to initialize more than 200 characters. — In an allocation, it has been found that the string does not fit the given variable.
  • Page 143
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Only 1 tool orientation can be programmed per DIN block. This can either be defined via the 3 Euler angles, or the end points of the axes, or through direction vectors. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 144
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: IPerform initialization in separate block in the execution part of the program: DEF FRAME LOCFRAME LOCFRAME = CTRANS(X,200) When using for axis variables:…
  • Page 145
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block. Define the required variable in the definition part of the program (possibly in the calling program if it is to be a global variable).
  • Page 146
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 147
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12340 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 number of parameters too high %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string Definitions: When calling a function or a procedure (predefined or user-defined) more parameters were transferred than defined.
  • Page 148
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12370 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 range of values %3 not permissible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string Definitions: A variable has been initialized with a value range outside an initialization block. The definition of program-global variables is allowed only in special initialization blocks.
  • Page 149
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 150
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block. The symbol to be created or the target of program jumps (label) must conform to the system specifications, that means the name must begin with 2 letters (but the 1st sign must not be «$») and may be up to a maximum of 32 characters.
  • Page 151
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12460 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 maximum number of symbols exceeded with %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string Definitions: The max. number of variable definitions (GUD, LUD), macro definitions, cycle programs and/or cycle parameters (PROC instruction) that the controller’s data management system is able to handle has been exceeded.
  • Page 152
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A non-allowed G function number (parameter 3) has been programmed for a G group with indirect G code programming. Only the G function numbers indicated in the Programming Guide «Fundamentals», Section 12.3 «List of G functions/Path conditions»…
  • Page 153
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block. — Use the REDEF instruction only in the INITIAL_INI block…
  • Page 154
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms N … Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 155
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The maximum internal block length after translator processing must not exceed 256 characters. After editing, for example, several macros in the block or a multiple nesting, this limit can be exceeded. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 156
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12553 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 name %3 option/function is not active Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: The option (if MD10711 $MN_NC_LANGUAGE_CONFIGURATION = 1) or the NC function (if MD10711 $MN_NC_LANGUAGE_CONFIGURATION = 3) related to this language command is not active.
  • Page 157
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12556 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 name %3 Name is already known Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: The name of the symbol to be created is part of the NC language scope and therefore already known. Although the NC function is not active, this name can no longer be used for GUDs, macros and PROC definitions.
  • Page 158
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12571 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 %3 not permissible for motion synchronous action Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: The predefined subprogram %3 specified here is not allowed in a block with motion synchronous action. It may only be contained in a «normal»…
  • Page 159
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12581 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 invalid read access to %3 while in motion synchronous action Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: In a motion synchronous action, the displayed variable must not be entered as a variable that is to be read online, i.e.
  • Page 160
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12584 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 variable %3 cannot be read synchronously with motion Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: In motion synchronous actions on the left side of the compare operation, only special variables are allowed as input variables of SYNFCT and as input variables for PUTFTOCF.
  • Page 161
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12587 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: operation/function %3 not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number %3 = Operator/function Definitions: The specified function / operator is not permissible for logic operations of real-time variables in motion synchronous actions.
  • Page 162
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The number of global user data blocks is defined in MD18118 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES. Here, _N_SGUD_DEF corresponds to block 1, _N_MGUD_DEF corresponds to block 2, _N_UGUD_DEF corresponds to block 3, _N_GUD4_DEF corresponds to block 4 etc.
  • Page 163
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12630 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 skip ID/label in control structure not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number Definitions: Blocks with control structures (FOR, ENDIF, etc.) cannot be concealed and must not contain any labels.
  • Page 164
    The programmed language element is not allowed or unknown in external language mode. Only the language elements from Siemens mode which are used for subprogram calls (except for Lxx) and the language constructs for program repetition with REPEAT (UNTIL) are allowed.
  • Page 165
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12722 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 multiple ISO_2/3 macro or cycle calls in the block Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: A mixture of cycle and macro calls are programmed in a block, e.g. cycle calls with G81 — G89 together with an M macro in the block or a G65/G66 macro call together with M macros in the block.
  • Page 166
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12730 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no valid transformation machine data parameterized Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The machine data MD24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1, MD24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1], MD24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[1] are incorrectly set for G07.1, G12.1.
  • Page 167
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — correct ISOPRINT command — within an ISOPRINT command, only format instructions of the same type %m.nP or %.nP may be applied Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 168
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14004 [Channel %1: ] Program %2 cannot be started because of a channel-specific start disable Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = (path with program name) Definitions: The selected program %2 in channel%1 cannot be executed because the channel-specific start disable is set for this channel.
  • Page 169
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Program %3 cannot be executed because it has been disabled by another application, for example the HMI Editor. Background: Program %3 is on an external data carrier (CF card, network drive, USB device), and should be executed from there in EES mode (Execution from External Storage).
  • Page 170
    For interrupt routines, two additional program levels can be used. This means that the total number of program levels is increased to 18. The program levels are jointly used by user programs and Siemens cycles and/or Siemens applications such as ShopMill and ShopTurn.
  • Page 171
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In a subroutine call the programmed number of passes P is zero or negative. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Program number of passes between 1 and 9 999.
  • Page 172
    Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Modify parts program. Please see the Siemens Progamming Guide or OEM documentation for the language commands permissible for the relevant system configuration. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 173
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: — An illegal parameter value was specified in a function or procedure call. — An illegal number of actual parameters was programmed in a function or procedure call. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 174
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14025 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: illegal modal ID Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In modal motion synchronous actions an illegal ID number has been assigned.
  • Page 175
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14030 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 combine OSCILL and POSP during oscillation with infeedmotion Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: When oscillating controlled by synchronized actions, the assignment of oscillating and infeed axis (OSCILL) as well as the definition of the infeed (POSP) must be carried out in one NC block.
  • Page 176
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: With involute interpolation, the end point of the involute must be outside the basic circle. The programmed center point / radius or end point must be adapted accordingly. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 177
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms An alarm message is issued if the difference between the circle radii is either — greater than the value in the MD21000 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST (for small radii, if the programmed radius is smaller than the quotient of the machine data MD21000 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST divided by MD21010…
  • Page 178
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: For calculating arithmetic expressions in NC blocks, an operand stack with a fixed set size is used. With very complex expressions, this stack can overflow. This may also occur with extensive expressions in synchronized actions.
  • Page 179
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14065 [channel %1: ] block %2 error in SPRINT/ISOPRINT command: error code %4 information %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Additional information %4 = Error code…
  • Page 180
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 14070 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 memory for variables not sufficient for subroutine call Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 181
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14085 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 instruction not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The instruction ‘TML()’ may only be used in the subprogram, which replaces the T command.
  • Page 182
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 14092 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 is wrong axis type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 183
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The polynomial degree in the polynomial interpolation is based on the number of programmed coefficients for an axis. The maximum possible polynomial degree is 3, i.e. the axes are according to the function:…
  • Page 184
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14097 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 string cannot be converted to AXIS type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The called function AXNAME — conversion of the transferred parameters of the STRING type to an axis name (return value) of the AXIS type — has not found this axis identifier in the machine data.
  • Page 185
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14103 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 error %3 when calling function CORRTRAFO. Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 186
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Reduce the number of initialization values. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 14140 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 position programming without transformation not allowed…
  • Page 187
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14159 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 more than two angles programmed with ROTS or AROTS Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Frame rotations are described using space angles with the language commands ROTS or AROTS. A maximum of two angles can be programmed.
  • Page 188
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 3Tool length offset components have been programmed in one block with both TOFF and TOFFL. 4An index must be declared when a tool length offset is programmed with TOFF, the form TOFF=..is not permissible.
  • Page 189
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A D word and H word have been programmed simultaneously. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Modify part program.
  • Page 190
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14210 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 polar angle too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 191
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14270 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 pole programmed incorrectly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: When defining the pole, an axis was programmed that does not belong to the selected processing level.
  • Page 192
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14320 [Channel %3: ] Axis %4: handwheel %1 used twice (%2) Parameters: %1 = Handwheel number…
  • Page 193
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Modify part program; program defined transformations only. Check MD24… $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_… (assigns the transformation to the part program operation). Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 194
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Modify part program or machine data. Only with active «OEM transformation» compile cycle: Reference the axes included in the transformation before selecting transformation.
  • Page 195
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — An attempt was made to remove a geometry axis with the same name as one of the channel axes from the geometry axis grouping. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set.
  • Page 196
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms ENDPROC 4. Subroutine structure with keyword and subroutine name (with parameter transfer «call-by-reference»): PROC UPNAME (Typ1 VARNAME1, Typ2 VARNAME2, …) ENDPROC Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 197
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14601 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 reload buffer could not be deleted Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The reload buffer for «execute from external» could not be deleted. Possible cause: — HMI/PLC communication was not terminated.
  • Page 198
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — Cancel program with reset. — Correct program on HMI or PC. — Restart reloading (possibly with block search and interrupt location). Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 199
    If the runtime error occurred as the result of a temporary excessive load on the system (e.g. in the HMI area or in OEM applications) error-free execution is possible on repeating the program or operator action. Otherwise, place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON.
  • Page 200
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 101: Error on selection of tool length compensation 102: Error on selection of transformation 103: Error on selection of synchronized spindle 104: Error on selection of work offset 105: Error after WRITE lock on the selected program Particularly when tool management is active, it is possible that a tool on the spindle or the toolholder is disabled but still needs to be activated.
  • Page 201
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14712 [Channel %1: ] Error selecting JOG Retract: error code %4 info %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Is not used %3 = Additional information %4 = Error code Definitions: An error occurred on the selection of JOG Retract, which is described in more detail by the error code (parameter%4):…
  • Page 202
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Processing of motion-synchronous actions requires resources that are configured using MD28060 $MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE, MD28070 $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP, MD28251 $MC_MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS, MD28250 $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS, and MD28253 $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_STRINGS. If these resources are insufficient for the execution of the part program, then this alarm is issued.
  • Page 203
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14756 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: %3 wrong value Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID Definitions: Illegal value. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 204
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14760 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 auxiliary function of a group programmed repeatedly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The M and H functions can be divided up as required over machine data in groups in any variation.
  • Page 205
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A maximum of 5 auxiliary functions of type «M» may be entered in an NC block. The upper limit is the total of programmed and implicitely generated M auxiliary functions. Implicit auxiliary functions M19 and M70 are generated, if in MD35035 $MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK, bit 19 has been set for M19 and/or bit 20 for M70.
  • Page 206
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms SynSpi option Repos option Spline option Involute option Poly option Compress option Masl option ExtLang or ExtLanguage option not activated TechCycle option Liftfast option ProgAccel option AllAsupSynact option CmdAxSpind option Mea2 option ProgAnaOut option…
  • Page 207
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Masl option ExtLang or ExtLanguage option not activated TechCycle option Liftfast option ProgAccel option AllAsupSynact option CmdAxSpind option Mea2 option ProgAnaOut option OptAaTOff option MachineMaintenance option PathFeedSAInput option ElecTransfer option Cut3D option CDA option…
  • Page 208
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14790 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 programmed by PLC Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis Definitions: In the NC block, an axis has been programmed that is already being traversed by the PLC.
  • Page 209
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Adjust the value range in accordance with the Programming Guide. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 210
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14840 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 incorrect value range for constant cutting speed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 211
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Select an appropriate tool prior to the SVC instruction. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14862 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 SVC has been programmed, but the radius of the active tool…
  • Page 212
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14920 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 intermediate point of circle incorrect Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 213
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 15110 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 REORG not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In order to synchronize the preprocessing run and the main run with REORG, the control accesses modification data which are maintained in a logfile.
  • Page 214
    Please load a suitable archive file before continuing machining to avoid subsequent problems. Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. File /_N_MPF_DIR/_N_SIEMDIAGMEMPF_MPF contains information that may help Siemens for error diagnostics. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 215
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 15165 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 error when translating or interpreting ASUB %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = String Definitions: At part program start and at start of an ASUB under Reset condition, the relevant data of all the ASUBs that can be…
  • Page 216
    Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: The restore file ‘restoreafs.inm’ was not executed. The file lies on the CF Card under /siemens/sinumerik/sys_cach/ nck/ Remedy: Copy ‘restoreafs.inm’ via HMI to /_N_SYF_DIR/_N_RESTOREAFS_INM before the next restart, and then delete or rename the file on the CF card to prevent the restore file being executed at every restart.
  • Page 217
    %3 = Path and file name of the modified SIEMENS cycle Definitions: When executing a SIEMENS cycle modified by the user, a cycle alarm was output with SETAL() (see follow-up alarm in the alarm output). Since the SIEMENS cycle was modified by the user (e.g. machine manufacturer), the cause for the cycle alarm must be determined / eliminated by the user who modified the cycle.
  • Page 218
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 15187 [Channel %1: ] Error during execution of PROGEVENT file %3. Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Is not used %3 = PROGEVENT file name Definitions: An error has occurred on executing PROGEVENT.
  • Page 219
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The following deadlock has been found in the interpreter: Memory is needed for calling a subroutine. The module memory is, however, empty and there is no prospect of module memory becoming free again by executing the preprocessing/main run queue, because this queue is empty.
  • Page 220
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 15340 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 invalid label as search target Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Syntax error! A label must have at least 2 but no more than 32 characters, and the first two characters must be alphabetic or underscore characters.
  • Page 221
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Find search destination in which the axes are programmed using an absolute reference. Deactivate adding of the accumulated search position with SD42444 $SC_TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG = FALSE. Use search run with calculation «at contour».
  • Page 222
    Definitions: A SETAL command has been programmed with a cycle alarm number smaller than 60 000 or greater than 69 999. Alarm reaction of Siemens standard cycles: Nos. 61 000 -61 999: Interpreter stop; delete with Reset Nos. 62 000 — 62 999: Compensation block; delete with NC Start Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 223
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 15810 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 wrong array dimension for CONTPRON/CONTDCON Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The number of columns for the array created for CONTPRON/CONTDCON does not conform to the current programming guide.
  • Page 224
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 15950 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no traverse motion programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Measure with deletion of distance-to-go In the part program, no axis or a traversing path of zero has been programmed with the command MEAS (measure with deletion of distance-to-go).
  • Page 225
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16010 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 machining stop after lift fast Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: LIFTFAST without interrupt routine (ASUB) has been programmed. The channel is stopped after the lift motion has been carried out.
  • Page 226
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Overview of reactions of common programming to LIFTFAST: Axis | Synact | Reaction to LIFTFAST —————————————— Path | | STOP + LIFTFAST | STOP + LIFTFAST | non-modal | STOP + LIFTFAST | modal | STOP + LIFTFAST | stati.
  • Page 227
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Assign the axes/spindles that are to be repositioned to the channel via GET command prior to the REPOS command. Example: GET(A); assign the A axis to the channel REPOSL A;…
  • Page 228
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16200 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 spline and polynominal interpolation not available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The spline and polynomial interpolation are options that are not contained in the basic version of the control.
  • Page 229
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16420 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 programmed repeatedly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: It is not allowed to program an axis more than once.
  • Page 230
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16510 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no facing axis for diameter programming available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Diameter programming has been activated although no transverse axis with diameter programming has been applied.
  • Page 231
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16679 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Motion synchronized action: %3 Slave spindle/axis %4 not available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID %4 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: A coupling was switched-in or switched-out, where the slave spindle/axis is presently not available.
  • Page 232
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In the applied function (G74, reference point approach), the spindle must be stationary. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Program M5 or SPOS/SPOSA in front of the defective block in the part program.
  • Page 233
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — check circle programming or — assign pitch parameter to the axis with the longest traversing distance. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 16740…
  • Page 234
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Procedure for automatically engaging the suitable gear stage prior to thread cutting: * Program the spindle speed (S) in a G331 block without axis motions and prior to thread cutting, e.g. G331 S1000.
  • Page 235
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: No Stop is needed for the programmed function. A Stop is necessary after SPOSA or after M5 if the next block is to be loaded only after a spindle stop. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 236
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The following spindle/axis has not been written in the part program. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify part program.
  • Page 237
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16775 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: %3 axis %4 no measuring system available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID %4 = Axis name, spindle number…
  • Page 238
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16810 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 traverse instruction ACP for axis %3 not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The keyword ACP (Absolute Coordinate Positive) is only allowed for «modulo axes». It causes approach of the programmed absolute position in the specified direction.
  • Page 239
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 16904 [Channel %1: ] Program control: action %2<ALNX> not allowed in the current state Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: The operation (program, JOG, block search, reference point, etc.) cannot be started or continued in the current status.
  • Page 240
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16909 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> not allowed in current mode Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: A different operating mode must be activated for the activated function.
  • Page 241
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16915 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> not allowed in the current block Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: If traversing blocks are interrupted by asynchronous subroutines, then it must be possible for the interrupted program to continue (reorganization of block processing) after termination of the asynchronous subroutine.
  • Page 242
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 16923 [Channel %1: ] Program control: action %2<ALNX> not allowed in the current state Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: The current processing cannot be stopped since a preprocessing process is active.
  • Page 243
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A program interrupt has been activated in a non REORG capable block. Examples of possible program interrupts in this case: — Traversing to fixed stop — Vdi channel delete distance-to-go — Vdi axial delete distance-to-go…
  • Page 244
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16932 [Channel %1: ] Conflict when activating user data type %2 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Data type Definitions: The «activate user data» function (PI service _N_SETUDT) modifies a data block (tool offset, settable work offset or base frame) which is also written by the NC blocks in preparation.
  • Page 245
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 16936 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> not possible due to active dry run Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: This action is not allowed as dry run feedrate is currently active.
  • Page 246
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Reorganization events are waiting for the end of a gear change. The alarm is displayed during the waiting period. Reaction: Alarm display. Warning display. Remedy: Alarm is suppressed by means of MD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK bit 1 = 0.
  • Page 247
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The action in the 2nd parameter was rejected, since an asynchronous subprogram is currently active. Currently, only the integrated search run is rejected with this alarm. The integrated search run is activated, if search run is triggered in the Stop program state.
  • Page 248
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16946 [Channel %1: ] Start via START is not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel ID Definitions: This alarm is active with «Group Serupro» only. «Group Serupro» is activated by means of MD10708 $MN_SERUPRO_MASK, Bit 2 and enables the retrace support of entire channel groups during block search.
  • Page 249
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16951 [Channel %1: ] Search run in a protected program section. Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: A part programmer can define protected part program sections with the language commands IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK. Every search run in these program sections will then be acknowledged with alarm 16951. In other words: When the alarm appears, the user has started a search run (Serupro type) and the search target lies in a protected area.
  • Page 250
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In a program area (stop delay area) that is bracketed with DELAYFSTON and DELAYFSTOF, a program command was used that causes a stop. No commands other than G4 are permissible that might cause a stop even though only shortly.
  • Page 251
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The function (2nd parameter) must not be activated during simulation search. Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Wait for search end. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 16960 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> prohibited during EXECUTE PROGRAM AREA.
  • Page 252
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Eliminate pending alarms. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 16966 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> prohibited during Jog Retract Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: The function (2nd parameter) must not be activated during Jog Retract.
  • Page 253
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — If the alarm occurs while writing one of the parameters $TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2/$TC_MLSR, check whether machine data MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC / MD18076$MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE has been set correctly. MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC defines the number of different Index1 statements that may be made for an Index2 value.
  • Page 254
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: General: Read or write access has been programmed to an array variable with an illegal 1st array index. The valid array indices must lie within the defined array size and the absolute limits (0 — 32,766).
  • Page 255
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17040 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegal axis index Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: A read or write access has been programmed to an axial variable in which the axis name cannot be unambiguously imaged on a machine axis.
  • Page 256
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 17060 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 requested data area too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The maximum memory space of 8 KB available for a symbol has been exceeded.
  • Page 257
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17090 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 %3 value exceeds upper limit Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = MD Definitions: An attempt was made to write into a machine data with a value greater than the defined upper limit.
  • Page 258
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17120 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 analog input no. %3 not activated Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Input number Definitions: An attempt has been made by means of the system variable $A_INA[n] to read an analog input n that has not been activated by the MD10300 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS.
  • Page 259
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17160 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no tool selected Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: An attempt has been made to access the current tool offset data via the system variables:…
  • Page 260
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17181 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 T no.= %3, D no.= %4 not existing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = T number %4 = D number Definitions: A programmed D number was not recognized by the NC.
  • Page 261
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Check tool call in the NC part program: — Correct tool number T.. programmed? — Tool parameters P1 — P25 defined? The dimensions of the tool edge must have been entered previously either through the operator panel or through the V.24 interface.
  • Page 262
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In the displayed block, a tool holder that is not defined is accessed. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Check the programming of the tool holder in the NC program.
  • Page 263
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17270 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 call-by-reference: illegal variable Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Machine data and system variables must not be transferred as call-by-reference parameters. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 264
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17502 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 indexing axis %3 with Hirth tooth system stop is delayed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis name Definitions: For the indexing axis, the ‘Hirth tooth system’ function is activated and the override has been set to 0 or another stop condition (e.g.
  • Page 265
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Or, an attempt is made with a MOV movement to travel to a position outside the permitted area. Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 266
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Deselect the transformation with TRAFOOF ahead of time or remove the action from the part program block Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 17620…
  • Page 267
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 17800 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegally coded position programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The position number n specified with the keyword FP=n is not permissible.
  • Page 268
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 17813 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 fixed-point approach in JOG and override motion active Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number…
  • Page 269
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A ‘JOG to position’ has been requested for an axis. This is not possible because: Reason 1: The axis is involved in the active transformation. Reason 2: The axis is a following axis in an active coupling.
  • Page 270
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify SD43320 $SA_JOG_POSITION or indexing positions. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 271
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: At this point, the block context calls for a machine axis. This is the case with: — G74 (reference point approach) — G75 (fixed point approach) — PRESETON/PRESETONS on GANTRY synchronous axis…
  • Page 272
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 11: Contour definition incorrect or frame activated. 12: Other, not further specified errors. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Modify definition of the protection zone and check MD.
  • Page 273
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 18003 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 channel-specific protection zone %3 cannot be activated. Error code %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Number of the channel-specific protection zone…
  • Page 274
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — Modify the protection zone definition or do not simultaneously activate protection zones that have different orientations. — Check machine data and modify the protection zone definition if necessary. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 275
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Allocation of a fine shift to settable frames or the basic frame is not possible since MD18600 $MN_MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS is not equal to 1. Reaction: Interpreter stop Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 276
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: It is not allowed to change the geometry axis assignment because the current frame contains rotations. Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm.
  • Page 277
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. There are 3 possible causes of error: 1. The value entered in MD34030 $MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST is too small. Determine the maximum possible distance from the beginning of reference motion up to the reduction cam and compare with the value in MD34030 $MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST, increase the value in the MD if necessary.
  • Page 278
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20003 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 measuring system error Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: In a measuring system with distance-coded reference marks, the distance between two adjacent markers has been found to be more than twice the value entered in MD34300 $MA_ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST.
  • Page 279
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the possible reasons for termination: — Servo enable missing: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2.1 (Servo enable) — Measuring system switchover: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 / 1.6 (Position measuring system 1/2) — Traversing key + or — missing: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX4.7 / 4.6 (Traversing keys plus/minus)
  • Page 280
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: When setting MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 6 the 2nd encoder must first be referenced. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify referencing mode MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE or reference 2nd encoder.
  • Page 281
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 20054 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 wrong index for indexing axis in JOG mode Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: 1.
  • Page 282
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Local alarm reaction. Channel not ready. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Correct the part program or — Specify the correct feed for PLC axes at the VDI interface, — Specify feed for oscillating axes in the SD43740 $SA_OSCILL_VELO.
  • Page 283
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20062 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 already active Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The displayed axis is already traversing as a machine axis. Therefore, it cannot be operated as a geometry axis.
  • Page 284
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Specify smaller target position. Modify MD for SW limit switch. Possibly activate another SW limit switch. Retract axis via JOG. Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary.
  • Page 285
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the indexing axis number given by the PLC and correct this if necessary. If the indexing axis number is correct and the alarm results from an indexing position table that has been set too short, check the machine data for indexing axis declaration.
  • Page 286
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20085 [Channel %1: ] Contour handwheel: traverse direction or overtravel of beginning of block not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: Travel takes place on the path with the contour handwheel in the opposite direction to the programmed travel direction and the starting point of the path has been reached at the start of the block.
  • Page 287
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check and correct the characteristic data in the compensation table ($AN_CEC_OUTPUT_AXIS and $AN_CEC_MULT_BY_TABLE). If the error cannot be found, the alarm can be suppressed by switching off the compensation in the axis ($MA_CEC_ENABLE) or the tables, ($SN_CEC_TABLE_ENABLE).
  • Page 288
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: SETM(): use marker in valid value range; do not set the marker again. CLEARM(): use marker in valid value range. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 289
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20144 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: %3 system variable cannot be accessed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID Definitions: When using system variables, it is assumed that a read/write operation can access the required data successfully. In accesses to encoder actual values or digital I/Os, the result depends on the availability of the corresponding hardware components.
  • Page 290
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — MEASA was programmed in a synchronized action — Measurement is already active — Programming error (see alarm 21701) Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm.
  • Page 291
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Increase the number of the R variables or reduce the FIFO elements. MD28050 $MC_MM_NUM_R_PARAM = MD28262 $MC_START_AC_FIFO + MD28260 $MC_NUM_AC_FIFO *…
  • Page 292
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20308 [Channel %1: ] Manual traverse in the SZS coodinate system is not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: Manual traverse in the SZS coodinate system is not possible in JOG Retract mode.
  • Page 293
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 21610 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 encoder %3 frequency exceeded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number %3 = String (encoder number) Definitions: The maximum permissible frequency of the currently active encoder (axis-specific interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 / 1.6 (position measuring system 1/2)) in the axis-specific MD36300 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT [n] (n …
  • Page 294
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the interface signals DB380x DBX2.1 (Servo enable), DB380x DBX4001.7 (Pulse enable), check the drive signals DB390x DBX4001.7 (Pulses enabled), DB390x DBX4001.5 (Drive ready) for example with the PLC status display in the DIAGNOSTICS operating area.
  • Page 295
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 21616 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 overlaid motion active at transformation switchover Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The overlaid motion in the BCS changes its significance because of the transformation change and can therefore lead to undesired axis movements.
  • Page 296
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Modify part program. Change the incorrectly specified tool length compensation. Note: RESET alone is not enough if transformation also remains active during RESET. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 297
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 21665 [Channel %1: ] $AA_TOFF cleared Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: If the tool position is changed with RESET and $AA_TOFF is active during RESET, the position offset ($AA_TOFF) is cleared. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 298
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Measurement level 2 (MEASA, MEAWA, MEAC). There is an error in the programmed measurement task. Possible causes: — Invalid measurement mode — Invalid probe — Invalid encoder — Invalid number of measurement signal edges…
  • Page 299
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: — Check probe — Check start positioning for measuring — Check program Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 21740 Output value at analog output no. %1 has been limited Parameters: %1 = No.
  • Page 300
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 22000 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Spindle %3 Gear stage change in %4 not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Spindle number %4 = Gear stage…
  • Page 301
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: The gear stage is to be set prior to the corresponding machining step. If it is necessary, however, to change the gear stage within one of the above mentioned functions, this function must be switched off for the time of the gear stage change.
  • Page 302
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The gear stage required for axis mode has not been installed. A gear stage has been configured in MD35014 $MA_GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE, in which the spindle is to be in axis mode. This gear stage is checked whenever the spindle is switched into axis mode. The configured gear stage is compared with the gear stage output by the PLC (NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2000.0 — .2 (Actual…
  • Page 303
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: — An oriented spindle stop (SPOS/SPOSA) has been programmed or the position control of the spindle was switched on with SPCON but no spindle encoder has been defined. — When switching on the position control, the spindle speed is greater than the limiting speed of the measuring system.
  • Page 304
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In the case of SPOS/SPOSA with an absolute encoder, only the referencing mode MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 2 is supported! SPOS/SPOSA does not support MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 6 at all! Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 305
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The configured zero marker search velocity is too high. The encoder limit frequency is exceeded for the active measuring system. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 306
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The thread cutting axis has been stopped while a thread block was active. The stop can be caused by VDI signals that cause the feed to be interrupted. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 307
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 22272 [channel %1: ] block %2 axis %3 thread cutting: block length %4 too short for predefined thread pitch Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 308
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — Error code 13 : DB380x DBX5006.2 (Spindle start counterclockwise rotation; — Error code 14 : DB380x DBX5006.4 (Spindle positioning). Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 309
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Remedy conflict. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 22296 [Channel %1: ] Spindle %2 Error on gear stage change (cause: error code %3) Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 310
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 22321 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 PRESET not allowed during traverse motion Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: A preset command was sent from the HMI or PLC while an axis was traveling in JOG mode.
  • Page 311
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 25000 Axis %1 hardware fault of active encoder Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The signals of the currently active position actual value encoder (NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 = 1 (Position measuring system 1) or DB380x DBX1.6 = 1 (Position measuring system 2)) are missing, do not have the…
  • Page 312
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Channel not ready. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the measuring system in accordance with the instructions given by the measuring device manufacturer. Monitoring can be switched off by setting MD36310 $MA_ENC_ZERO_MONITORING[n] to 100 (n = encoder number: 1,2).
  • Page 313
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 25021 Axis %1 zero mark monitoring of passive encoder Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: Monitoring relates to the encoder that is not used by the position control. (NC-PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 = 0 (Position measuring system 1) or DB380x DBX1.6 = 0 (Position measuring system 2))
  • Page 314
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Channel not ready. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Check the speed setpoint cable (bus cable). — Check the actual values and direction of position control.
  • Page 315
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The NCK calculates for each interpolation point (setpoint) of an axis the actual value that should result based on an internal model. If this calculated actual value and the true machine actual value differ by a larger amount than given in the MD36400 $MA_CONTOUR_TOL, then the program is canceled and the alarm message is issued.
  • Page 316
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms A static offset can be added to the speed setpoint in the MD36720 $MA_DRIFT_VALUE. This is not included in the drift monitoring because it acts like a voltage work offset. Reaction: Alarm display.
  • Page 317
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 25105 Axis %1 measuring systems differ considerably Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The two measuring systems differ considerably, i.e. the cyclically monitored actual value difference between the two measuring systems is greater than the associated tolerance value set in the machine data MD36510 $MA_ENC_DIFF_TOL.
  • Page 318
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: For PROFIdrive: The drive signals a serious fault which prevents the drive from being ready. The exact cause of the fault can be found by evaluating the additionally output drive alarms (It may be necessary to activate these diagnostic alarms by parameterizing the MDs DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK, PROFIBUS_ALARM_ACCESS etc): Alarms 380500 and 380501 (or the corresponding alarm numbers implemented on the HMI side).
  • Page 319
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The clamped axis has been pushed out of its setpoint position. The permissible difference is defined in the axis-specific MD36050 $MA_CLAMP_POS_TOL. Clamping an axis is activated with the axis-specific interface signal DB380x DBX2.3 (Clamping process active).
  • Page 320
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms * In the case of rotary absolue encoders behind the gears (and activer traversing range extension in accordance with $MA_ENC_ABS_BUFFERING): Absolute position format (in Gx_XIST2) is complete/sufficient for position reconstruction via PowerOff in accordance with the following condition: $MA_ENC_RESOL*$MA_ENC_PULSE_MULT*$MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO must not be smaller than 2**32.
  • Page 321
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 26005 Axis %1 parameterization error: output rating Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: For analog drives: The output evaluation of the analog speed setpoint set in the MD32250 $MA_RATED_OUTVAL or in MD 32260 $MA_RATED_VELO is zero.
  • Page 322
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 26014 Axis %1 machine data %2 invalid value Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number %2 = String: MD identifier Definitions: Machine data includes a value that is not valid. Reaction: NC not ready.
  • Page 323
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Repeat entry with correct value and then Reset. Program Restart part program.Clear alarm with the RESET key in all channels of this mode group. Restart part program.
  • Page 324
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Channel not ready. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Rectify hardware error, replace encoder if necessary. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 26022 Axis %1 encoder %2 measurement with simulated encoder not possible…
  • Page 325
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: — Set P2038 = 1 or — Set P0922 = 100…199 or — Set bit 15 of MD13070 $MN_DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK (note the boundary conditions, see above) and execute a Power ON in each case.
  • Page 326
    Another possible cause is that a synchronized action needs to be finished before the path interpolation continues. The alarm is only output if MD11400 $MN_TRACE_SELECT = ‘H400’. The alarm output is normally suppressed. — MD11400 $MN_TRACE_SELECT has SIEMENS password protection. Reaction: Alarm display.
  • Page 327
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms The path interpolation stops abruptly at the end of the block indicated in the message (regenerative stop). Alarm 21620 is often triggered as a follow-up alarm. If not, the path continues after the block change.
  • Page 328
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Axis cannot be made a PLC-controlled axis. For the time being, the axis cannot be controlled at any state from the PLC. Reaction: Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Use Release or Waitp to make the axis a neutral one.
  • Page 329
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 26081 [Channel %1: ] Axis trigger of axis %2 was activated, but axis is not PLC-controlled Parameters: %1 = Channel %2 = Axis, spindle Definitions: The axis trigger for single axis was initiated. However, the axis is not PLC-controlled at the trigger time (therefore no single axis) or the position became invalid.
  • Page 330
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 26102 Axis %1 drive %2 sign of life missing Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number %2 = Drive number Definitions: For PROFIdrive only: The sign-of-life cell is no longer being updated by the drive.
  • Page 331
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Possible causes: — MD 30240 $MA_ENC_TYPE not equal to 0 as a result of an oversight; the encoder should actually be simulated (= 0). — MD 30220 $MA_ENC_MODULE_NR entered incorrectly, i.e. the logical drive numbers were transposed and an invalid value is stored for this drive in MD 13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS (see next paragraph), or a drive number which does not exist on the bus was entered (check the number for slaves, for example).
  • Page 332
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: With $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse] = 1 axis exchange not permitted. Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Set $AA_ESR_ENABLE[axis] = 0 before axis exchange.
  • Page 333: Drive Alarms

    NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 300406 Problem in the non-cyclic communication for basic address %1, additional information…

  • Page 334
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Remedy: — Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Create more space in the file system. It is normally sufficient to delete 2 NC programs or to free 4 — 8 Kbytes of memory.
  • Page 335
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Definitions: An error occurred during startup of the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master. Overview: Cause of the error, Par 1, Par 2, Par 3: — 01 = DPM version, DPM version, DPA version, — — 02 = DPM ramp-up timeout, DPM actual value status, DPM setpoint value status, —…
  • Page 336
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms 380003 PROFIBUS/PROFINET: Operating error, reason %1 parameter %2 %3 %4. Parameters: %1 = Cause of the error %2 = Parameter 1 %3 = Parameter 2 %4 = Parameter 3 Definitions: An operating error occurred on the PROFIBUS/PROFINET in cyclic mode.
  • Page 337
    — 05 = Source is not present. SDB source: — 99 = Passive file system: _N_SDB_DIR — 100 = CF card: /siemens/sinumerik/sdb/… — 101 = CF card: /addon/sinumerik/sdb/… — 102 = CF card: /oem/sinumerik/sdb/… — 103 = CF card: /user/sinumerik/sdb/…
  • Page 338
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Definitions: The generation of the PROFIBUS/PROFINET in the SDB does not conform to the configuration specifications of the NC in use. Overview: Cause of the error, par 1: — 01 = SDB contains slave/device without diagnostics slot, slave/device address…
  • Page 339
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms If no inconsistencies can be found in the parameters, compare these machine data with the configuration in SDB (STEP 7 project). In particular, check that the lengths configured for the individual slots do not result in area overlaps.
  • Page 340
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Remedy: Enter correct base addresses in the machine data: — For length=1: Correct machine data MN_HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN. — For length=2: Correct machine data MN_HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN. — NCK restart If the error cannot be eliminated by this procedure, please make a note of the error text and contact the control system manufacturer.
  • Page 341
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary. Continuation: 380076 PROFIBUS/PROFINET: No DO1 message frame: Bus %2 slave/device %1 Parameters: %1 = Slave/device address %2 = Number of the affected bus…
  • Page 342: Plc Alarms

    With this alarm, internal alarm states are displayed that, in conjunction with the transferred error text, provide information about the cause and location of the error. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Notify Siemens of this error together with the error message. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: Diagnostics Manual…

  • Page 343
    With this alarm, internal alarm states are displayed that, in conjunction with the transferred error number, provide information on the cause and location of the error. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Report this error to Siemens along with the type number. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 400003…
  • Page 344
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.4 PLC alarms 400008 Programming tool — version is not compatible %1 %2 Parameters: %1 = Programming tool version Definitions: This version is not compatible with the product level of the controller. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Translate the user program using a suitable programming tool version and load in the control.
  • Page 345
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.4 PLC alarms Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 400017 PLC TOOLMAN: missing table in DB9900 Definitions: The PLC TOOLMAN cannot find one of the tables 9900, 9901 or 9902. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Create the missing table(s).
  • Page 346: Cycle Alarms

    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 400024 Dynamically managed memory used up, area %1 Definitions: Memory overflow in area corresponding to memory area identification %1= 1xx: dynamic RAM, xx refers to internal RAM class %1= 2: MMF (user project)

  • Page 347
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61002 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Type of machining incorrectly defined Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Modify VARI parameter. 61003 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]No feed programmed in cycle…
  • Page 348
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61010 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Finishing allowance too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The finishing allowance for the base is greater than the total depth.
  • Page 349
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61018 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: function %4 not executable with NCK Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: 61019 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Parameter %4 incorrectly defined…
  • Page 350
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: 61025 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check tool carrier position Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: 61026 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Cycle cannot be executed with NC function %4.
  • Page 351
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: 61033 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect file type: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61034 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: File is full: %4…
  • Page 352
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61041 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Line range too large: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61042 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Program name %4 illegal…
  • Page 353
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: Part program (main program) not found in specified job list in respective channel. Check name and contents of job list. 61047 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Label name %4 too long…
  • Page 354
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61054 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Programs started from various job lists: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Programs from various job lists were started simultaneously. This is illegal. All programs must be assigned to the same job list.
  • Page 355
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61062 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Axis position %4incorrectly programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Check the last programmed axis position 61063 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Tool at magazine location %4 is not a multitool…
  • Page 356
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61102 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]No spindle direction programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Parameter SDIR (or SDR in CYCLE840) must be programmed. 61103 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Number of holes is zero…
  • Page 357
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Change milling direction. — During pocket machining (CYCLE63), the selected milling direction must match the milling direction of centering/ rough drilling. 61110 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Finishing allowance at the base is greater than the depth…
  • Page 358
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: The radius of the active tool is negative or zero. Remedy: Modify radius. 61118 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Length or width = 0 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The length or width of the milling area is illegal.
  • Page 359
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61126 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Thread length too short Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Program lower spindle speed or raise reference point (reference plane). 61127…
  • Page 360
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61133 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: 3rd parallel axis parameter incorrect, check axis name or GUD _SCW_N[] Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61134 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Rotary axis parameters incorrect, check values for rotary…
  • Page 361
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61140 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Main spindle is not set up correctly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Check the set up of the main spindle.
  • Page 362
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61147 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Transformation not active: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: The stated transformation is not active. You have to activate the transformation before you can use it.
  • Page 363
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Error causes: 1. Error code = A -> no tool or no cutting edge (D1..) active 2. Error code = B -> swivel «no» and swivel «direct», swivel plane «additive» not permitted 3.
  • Page 364
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Reduce plane infeed or slot width, or use milling cutter with larger diameter 61161 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Centering diameter or tool parameter (diameter, tip angle) are incorrect Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 365
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61168 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect machining plane: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: The machining plane is incorrect. Program correct machining plane. 61169 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Spindle incorrectly programmed…
  • Page 366
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61176 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: text length programmed too small Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The text length (_DF) in the engraving cycle is too short. This means that the text for engraving is longer than the specified text length.
  • Page 367
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Swivel CYCLE800: Check transfer parameter _FR. Value range 0 to 8 61184 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No solution possible with current input angle values Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The surface defined via the input angle cannot be processed with the machine.
  • Page 368
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Swivel mode direct: check the input values of the rotary axes or commissioning for swivel CYCLE800. Check angular range of rotary axes in swivel data record n: Rotary axis 1: $TC_CARR30[n], $TC_CARR32[n]…
  • Page 369
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61195 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Aligning a turning tool is only possible with active turning tool Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Aligning turning tools is only possible with one active turning tool.
  • Page 370
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: No technology cycle was programmed in the machining block. Remedy: Program a technology block. 61203 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No position cycle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: No positioning cycle was programmed in the machining block.
  • Page 371
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Repeat block search. 61211 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Absolute reference missing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: An incremental indication was made, but the absolute reference is unknown.
  • Page 372
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61219 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Tool radius too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The tool radius is too large for machining. Remedy: Select a suitable tool.
  • Page 373
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61227 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Target position cannot be reached: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The target position of the approach motion is outside the software limit switch. This situation may arise from swiveling or coordinate rotations.
  • Page 374
    %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The direction of the next machining is unknown. Remedy: Please contact the responsible Siemens regional office. 61239 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Tool change point lies within retraction area! Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 375
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61241 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Retraction plane not defined for this machining direction Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: No retraction plane has been defined for the selected machining direction.
  • Page 376
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61249 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Number of edges too small Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The number of edges is too small. Remedy: Increase number of edges.
  • Page 377
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61257 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: incomplete setup of counterspindle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Setup of the counterspindle is incomplete. Remedy: The following machine and setting data must be set for the counterspindle:…
  • Page 378
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61264 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Chained ShopTurn program blocks not permissible in subprogram on pos. pattern Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: If a subroutine is called from a position pattern, the subroutine itself must not include a position pattern.
  • Page 379
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61272 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Insertion depth too small Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Insertion depth on chamfering too small. Remedy: Increase the insertion depth. 61273…
  • Page 380
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61280 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: %4- Mirroring missing in work offset for counterspindle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The work offset for counterspindle machining does not have Z mirroring.
  • Page 381
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61288 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Main spindle not set up Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Set up main spindle in MD52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE. 61289 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Counterspindle not set up…
  • Page 382
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61296 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Blank programmed incorrectly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The blank has been programmed incorrectly. Remedy: Correct the blank. 61297 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Reference for incremental retraction plane missing…
  • Page 383
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check setpoint value and parameter _TSA For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4:…
  • Page 384
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61309 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check probe type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Measurement of workpiece: Check tool type of measuring probe in TOOLMAN. When measuring workpiece milling, it is preferred to use tool types 710, 712, 713 or 714. But a type 1xy can also be used.
  • Page 385
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Measure tool: Tool type impermissible for calibration (adjustment) of the tool probe. 61315 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check position of cutting edge Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: When measuring the workpiece in turning, cutting edge positions 7 and 8 are allowed for probe type 580.
  • Page 386
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61321 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check WO memory number Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check parameter _KNUM For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4:…
  • Page 387
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms — Check the actual pre-position of the workpiece probe with reference to the entered inner or outer measurement. 61327 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Program reset required Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: NC reset required.
  • Page 388
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: Parameter _CALNUM is too large, reduce it to a permissible value For 840D sl — up to SW 1.x: — Increase the maximum value of _CVAL[2] in GUD6 For 840D sl/828D — as from SW 2.5:…
  • Page 389
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 1.x: Check parameter _SPEED[0] in GUD6 For 840D sl/828D — as from SW 2.5: Check setting data 55630 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT For 840D sl/828D — as from SW 4.4: Check setting data 55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT…
  • Page 390
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: : — Parameter _SETV[0] or _SETV[1] is empty or less than 0. For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4: : — Parameter X1 or X2 is empty or less than 0.
  • Page 391
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Check parameter _PROTNAME[1] 61353 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Path for logfile not found Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: The specified directory does not exist or the specified path is incorrect.
  • Page 392
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Cycle CYCLE106 was called by an incorrect parameter. Remedy: Check cycle call for CYCLE106, specifically the call parameter. 61361 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Variable cannot be recorded Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 393
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61367 [channel %1: ] block %2: parameters %4 are identical Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up tp SW 4.3: — Specify different positions for the relevant points of _SETV[0…7]…
  • Page 394
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: — Check configuration/parameterization of the spindle axis — If the intention to use a 3D workpiece probe at a «non-SPOS capable spindle», then check the setting of MD 52207 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB[n], bit 9 (also see Commissioning instructions,…
  • Page 395
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Check the following machine or setting data: 51781 $MNS_MEA_T_PROBE_THICKNESS[n] 61381 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Coupling the spindle position with coordinate rotation around Z not executable Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: The alarm relates to the cross-measuring tasks measuring cycle function «Coupling of spindle position with coordinate…
  • Page 396
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check parameter _DLNUM For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4: — Check parameter DL Check the number of the sum offset and that of the setup offset.
  • Page 397
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61414 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 : distortion of triangle over limit Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Check the setpoint and actual values 61415…
  • Page 398
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61420 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check calibration of multi/mono probes. Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: The workpiece probe must be calibrated according to its type and use.
  • Page 399
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61425 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Parameter for measuring axis rotary axis 1 or 2 incorrect — Error code: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions:…
  • Page 400
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 4. Error code = D -> Rotary axis 1 not rotated for the 2nd or 3rd measurement with reference to the 1st measurement- > see parameter_OVR[60 to 62] 61430 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Kinematic vectors not computed — Error code: %4…
  • Page 401
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check the value in the parameter advance angle _INCA! — If 3-point measurement is selected, _INCA must not be greater/less than +/-120°, and with 4-point measurement _INCA must not be greater/less than +/-90°.
  • Page 402
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61503 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: tool nose radius compensation left or right Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: A tool offset value has to be programmed…
  • Page 403
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61511 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect shoulder position or tool edge D1/D2 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: 61512 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect longitudinal position…
  • Page 404
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61520 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Additional offsets not set Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Set MD18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM=10 61521 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Current grinding wheel too wide…
  • Page 405
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61529 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Dimensional notation INCH programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Basic system MD $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC does not correspond to programmed G command (G group 13).
  • Page 406
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61543 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect dresser selected when selecting the dresser coordinate system Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: A dresser number >0 and <4 must be selected…
  • Page 407
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61556 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Impossible chamfer and radius of left edge of wheel Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Check values in grinding wheel data…
  • Page 408
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61564 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Feed insertion is smaller than or equal to zero Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Check values in grinding wheel data…
  • Page 409
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61605 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Contour incorrectly programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Illegal relief cut element detected. Remedy: Check contour program. 61606 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Error during contour preparation…
  • Page 410
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms — It is not permissible that rotation is active. If required, deselect thread synchronization. 61613 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Undercut position incorrectly defined Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 411
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61620 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: %4-Mirroring for the linear axis of the counter spindle not permitted Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: It is not permissible that the linear axis of the counterspindle machining has Z mirroring.
  • Page 412
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61700 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Name of program to be generated is missing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check parameter PRG 61701 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Contour %4 does not exist…
  • Page 413
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61708 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Too many contours specified Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check number of contours — Max. two contours (machined part and blank contours) — Min.
  • Page 414
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61731 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Unable to determine contour direction Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check contours — Check whether the contour starting point exists…
  • Page 415
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Check cutting edge position in tool management 61739 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Blank must be closed contour Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check whether the blank contour is closed…
  • Page 416
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: — Check if two-channel cutting is active simultaneously in more than two channels. — Two channels only may be active simultaneously: a guide and a following channel. 61747 %[[channel %1: ] block %2: %]Incorrect guide channel for two-channel cutting (%4)
  • Page 417
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61754 %[[channel %1: ] block %2: %]Tool radii must have same size for rough cutting Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check if tool radii have the same size in guide and following channel.
  • Page 418
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61802 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Wrong axis type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The programmed axis is assigned to a spindle Remedy: 61803 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Programmed axis not available…
  • Page 419
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61810 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: ISO G code not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In the call block an impermissible ISO axis name was programmed.
  • Page 420
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: 61819 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Risk of collision on retraction: tool violates programmed contour Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: With G70 in ISO mode, the contour is violated during retraction to the starting point.
  • Page 421
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: 52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Bit 6: work offset value WO cannot be entered as absolute value (ShopTurn). 61857 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No rotary axis to accept a blank has been set up…
  • Page 422
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61864 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: The selection, tailstock yes/no must be identical in all channels Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The selection, tailstock yes/no in the program header must be identical in all channels.
  • Page 423
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Check contour call — Check whether the contours exist in the program storage (workpieces, subroutines or part programs) 61902 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Label %4 not existing in the pocket contour…
  • Page 424
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61910 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Error in the blank contour %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check programming of the blank contour 61911 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Error in island contour %4…
  • Page 425
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61918 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Cut. radius for residual mach. must be smaller than cut. radius for ref. tool Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check cutter radius for residual machining which must be smaller than cutter radius for reference tool !
  • Page 426
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Modify contour programming 61935 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Programming of inch/metric measuring system not allowed here Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Modify contour programming…
  • Page 427
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61942 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Helix violates contour Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check helix radius and reduce in size, if possible 61943 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Approach/retract motion violates contour…
  • Page 428
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: — Check programming of the island/pocket contour 61950 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]No residual material available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61951 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Cutter radius for residual material too large…
  • Page 429
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: 62103 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No finishing allowance programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: No finishing allowance is programmed, although it is necessary for this machining.
  • Page 430
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 62181 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Set rotary axis %4 [deg] Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Sample display of the swivel angle to be set for a manual rotary axis in CYCLE800: 62181 «Set rotary axis B: 32.5 [grd]»…
  • Page 431
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 62200 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Start spindle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Stop prior to thread machining, as the spindle is in stop position. Remedy: Start the tool spindle before machining the thread.
  • Page 432
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 62306 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Permissible measuring difference exceeded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: The difference between actual and setpoint value is larger than tolerance parameter _TDIF, tool data are not corrected.
  • Page 433
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: Check _PROTFORM[0] in the program. 62314 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Traverse path limitation via software end position, collision detection activated, continue with NC START / cancel with RESET. Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 434: Plc User Alarms

    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.6 PLC user alarms Remedy: Measurement of the individual edges shows that the specified number of edges lies outside the dimensional difference. A decision has to be made: whether or not one can continue working with this tool.

  • Page 435: System Responses

    System responses System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms Identifier COMPBLOCKWITHREORG Effects Block preparation has detected an error, which can be rectified by modifying the program. Reorganization is performed after a program modification. • Correction block with reorganization. Identifier COMPENSATIONBLOCK Effects Block preparation has detected an error, which can be rectified by modifying the program. •…

  • Page 436
    System responses 4.1 System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms Identifier NOREADY | BAGREACTIONVIEW Effects Mode group ready off: Active fast braking (i.e. with maximum braking current) of the drives in this mode group, the controller enable of the NC axes involved is deleted. •…
  • Page 437
    System responses 4.1 System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms Identifier SHOWALARMAUTO Effects The alarm is displayed whenever bit 0 of machine data ENABLE_ALARM_MASK is set. The reaction should be set whenever an alarm should only occur during automatic mode without manual operation by the user.
  • Page 438: Cancel Criteria For Alarms

    System responses 4.2 Cancel criteria for alarms Cancel criteria for alarms Identifier CANCELCLEAR Effects The alarm is cleared in any channel when the Cancel key is pressed. It is also cleared by the Start part program key. • Clear the alarm with the «ALARM CANCEL» key or with the «CYCLE START» key. Identifier CLEARHIMSELF Effects…

  • Page 439: Sinamics V70 Alarms

    SINAMICS V70 alarms Overview of alarms Differences between faults and alarms The differences between faults and alarms are as follows: Type Description Faults What happens when a fault occurs? • If the servo motor is running, it stops running. • If the servo motor is not running, it cannot run.

  • Page 440
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.1 Overview of alarms Fault acknowledgements The acknowledgement methods for faults are specified as follows: Acknowledgement Description POWER ON The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON (switch servo drive off and on again). NOTE: If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immediately after power-on.
  • Page 441: Common Faults And Alarms

    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Status indicator Color Status Description Communication with CNC is not active Green Flash at 0.5 Hz Communication with CNC is active Flash at 2 Hz SD card operating (read or write) Continuously lit Communication with CNC is in error Common faults and alarms This section lists common faults and alarms that may occur on the SINAMICS V70.

  • Page 442
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F1018: Booting has been Module booting was interrupted several • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). interrupted several times times. As a consequence, the module After switching on, the module reboots from boots with the factory setting.
  • Page 443
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7011: Motor • • Motor overloaded Reduce the motor load. overtemperature • • Motor ambient temperature too high Check the ambient temperature and the Reaction: OFF2 motor ventilation. • Wire breakage or sensor not connected •…
  • Page 444
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7412: Commutation angle An incorrect commutation angle was • If the encoder mounting was changed, re- incorrect (motor model) detected that can result in a positive adjust the encoder. coupling in the speed controller.
  • Page 445
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7452: Following error too The difference between the position Check the causes and resolve. high setpoint position actual value (following error dynamic model) is greater than the Reaction: OFF1 tolerance.
  • Page 446
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7995: Pole position The pole position identification routine was Contact the Hotline. identification not successful unsuccessful. Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledgement: IMMEDIATELY • F30001: Power unit: The power unit has detected an Check the motor data — if required, carry out Overcurrent overcurrent condition.
  • Page 447
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F30011: Line phase failure in At the power unit, the DC link voltage ripple • Check the main circuit fuses. main circuit has exceeded the permissible limit value. • Check whether a single-phase load is Reaction: OFF2 Possible causes:…
  • Page 448
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F30036: Internal The temperature inside the drive converter • Check whether the fan is running. overtemperature has exceeded the permissible temperature • Check the fan elements. limit. Reaction: OFF2 •…
  • Page 449
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F52980: Absolute encoder The servo motor with absolute encoder is The servo motor will be automatically motor changed changed. Actual motor ID is different from configured after the acknowledgement of this commissioned motor ID.
  • Page 450
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms A1032: All parameters The parameters of an individual drive object Save all parameters. must be saved were saved, although there is still no backup of all drive system parameters. The saved object-specific parameters are not loaded the next time that the system powers For the system to successfully power up, all of the parameters must have been completely…
  • Page 451
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms A7991: Motor data The motor data ident. routine is activated. The alarm automatically disappears after the identification activated motor data identification routine has been The motor data identification routine is carried successfully completed. out at the next power-on command.
  • Page 452
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 453: Data Backup

    Data backup Overview of internal/external data backup You can back up user data internally or externally on the control system. Note Archiving/data backup It is recommended that you regularly back up the internal SINUMERIK memory on a USB stick. You can transfer the backed up data to the SINUMERIK later on. In this way you can restore the previous status of the unit.

  • Page 454
    Data backup 6.2 Internal data backup Note While making an internal data backup, you must neither operate nor turn off the control system. Loading internally backed-up data To load the internally backed-up data, proceed as follows: Select the desired operating area. Open the window for selecting the start up modes.
  • Page 455: External Data Backup

    Data backup 6.3 External data backup External data backup 6.3.1 External data backup in a data archive Operating sequence Select the desired operating area. Press this softkey to open the window for creating or restoring a start-up archive. There are three options for creating a data archive: ①…

  • Page 456
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup ① The following takes option as an example, and the name of the data archive is «arc_series.arc» by default. You can use your favourite name for it. Select your desired folder and press the following key to open it: Press this softkey to confirm and the archive information dialog opens.
  • Page 457: External Data Backup Of Files

    Data backup 6.3 External data backup 6.3.2 External data backup of files Operating sequence Select the desired operating area. Press this horizontal softkey to open the system data window. Three folders and one file are available in this window. Select a desired folder and press this key to open it. Select the file that you desire to back up, and press this softkey.

  • Page 458: External Data Backup In Case Of Backlight Failure

    To enable the RS232 communication between a controller and a PC/PG, you must have the RS232 communication tool SinuComPCIN installed on your PC/PG. You can get this tool from the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox. Data transferring with an RS232 cable and communication settings Proceed as follows to transfer data via the RS232 interface: Connect the control system with the PC/PG using an RS232 cable.

  • Page 459
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Use this key to set the values in the following window as required: Press this softkey to save your settings. If desired, you can press the following softkey to reset the settings to defaults: Return to the RS232 main screen.
  • Page 460: External Data Backup Through The Ethernet Interface

    Ethernet connection between a controller and a PC/PG (refer to Section «Configuring the Ethernet connection (Page 46)»). This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox and is supported by Windows XP/Vista/Win 7. For more information about the AMM tool, refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual.

  • Page 461
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Operating sequence: Open the main screen of the AMM tool on your PC. Select a desired file to be backed up (for example, Test.mpf) from the NC file system. Copy the program file with the toolbar button , keyboard shortcuts (Ctrl + C), or from the context menu.
  • Page 462: Loading Externally Backed-Up Data

    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Operating sequence: Select the desired operating area on the PPU. Navigate to the NC file that you desire to back up, and copy it to the buffer memory on the control system with this softkey. Press this softkey to view the network drive(s) created.

  • Page 463
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Loading separate files Select the desired operating area. Press this softkey to open the system data window. Press a softkey according to the backup path of the file. Find the file backed up and press this softkey. For the RS232 directory, press the following softkey instead: Press this softkey.
  • Page 464
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 465: Updating Software

    Updating software You can update the control system using a USB stick connected via the USB interface at the front of the control system. Note You must back up the data of the control system (NC/PLC/HMI) before you start the update! For information about the data back-up, see section «Data backup (Page 453)».

  • Page 466
    Updating software The update process has been completed when these two error messages appear. Press this key or the key combination below to clear the alarms. → Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 467
    Appendix A List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning ASCII American Standard Code for Information American coding standard for the exchange of Interchange information AUTO Operating mode «Automatic» ASUP Asynchronous subprogram AUXFU Auxiliary Function Auxiliary function Binary file Computerized Numerical Control Computerized numerical control Central Processing Unit Central processing unit…
  • Page 468
    Appendix A Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning Ladder Diagram Ladder diagram Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode Local User Data Local user data Machine Control Panel Machine control panel Machine Data Machine data Manual Data Automatic Manual input Machine Coordinate System Machine coordinate system Main Program File Main program (NC part program)
  • Page 469
    Appendix A Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning Smooth approach and retraction Work Workpiece coordinate system Tool Tool Tool Length Compensation Tool length compensation Tool Change Tool change Tool Management Tool management Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 470
    Appendix A Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 471: Index

    Index System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms, 435 Cancel criteria for alarms, 438 update the control system, 465 Uploading backed-up data, 462 Data Backup Internal, 453 External data backup of files, 457 General information about faults and alarms Differences between faults and alarms, 439 Fault acknowledgements, 440 Fault reactions, 439 List of abbreviations, 467…

  • Page 472
    Index Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…

Добрый день . Не знаю к кому обратиться . Может вы поможете . Проблема по Senimeric 802s. Запустил программу обработки. На финальной стадии добавил скорости подачи. станок при сверлении остановился и выдал ошибку. 003000, сбросил ее , выдал ошибку 700027 и 700016. сбросил ошибки . Программы без участия шпинделя работают нормально, оси бегают , все ок . при запуске любой программы где есть вращение шпинделя программа выдает при запуске эти ошибки. Без участия шпинделя , все в порядке . Решил попробовать в режиме jog , включаю вращение шпинделя , сразу выскакивают эти-же ошибки. По ошибкам 700027 и 700016 ничего не нашёл . по ошибке 003000 есть информация , но не совсем понятно. Ошибки сбросил , где искать наезд на датчик аварийной остановки не нашёл . Программу сто раз перезагружал , загружал старые сейвы. Автоматы в управлении вроде все включены , нету выбитых , может конечно сгорел предохранитель на блоке питания или на плате , но врятли , тогда бы вообще ничего не работало думаю. В общем если сможете помочь в разрешении этой проблемы , был бы премного благодарен.

  • Цитата

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Синумерик 808d коды ошибок
  • Синхронизация google контактов ошибка синхронизации
  • Синяя ошибка win 10
  • Синтетический пакет ошибка
  • Синтетические ошибки примеры